2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The pkgsrc guide
|
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
Documentation on the NetBSD packages system
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Alistair Crooks
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<agc@NetBSD.org>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hubert Feyrer
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<hubertf@NetBSD.org>
|
|
|
|
|
2004-11-02 14:29:15 +01:00
|
|
|
The pkgsrc Developers
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Copyright (C) 1994-2004 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-24 14:45:19 +02:00
|
|
|
$NetBSD: pkgsrc.xml,v 1.7 2005/05/24 12:39:00 wiz Exp $
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Abstract
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Information about using the NetBSD package system (pkgsrc) from both a user
|
|
|
|
view for installing packages as well as from a pkgsrc developers' view for
|
|
|
|
creating new packages.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Introduction
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
1.1. Introduction
|
|
|
|
1.2. Overview
|
|
|
|
1.3. Terminology
|
|
|
|
1.4. Typography
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
I. The pkgsrc user's guide
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. Where to get pkgsrc
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2.1. As tar file
|
|
|
|
2.2. Via SUP
|
|
|
|
2.3. Via CVS
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. Using pkgsrc on systems other than NetBSD
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3.1. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
3.2. Platform specific notes
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3.2.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
|
|
|
3.2.2. FreeBSD
|
|
|
|
3.2.3. Interix
|
|
|
|
3.2.4. IRIX
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
3.2.5. Linux
|
|
|
|
3.2.6. OpenBSD
|
|
|
|
3.2.7. Solaris
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4. Using pkgsrc
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4.1. Working with binary packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4.1.1. Where to get binary packages
|
|
|
|
4.1.2. How to use binary packages
|
|
|
|
4.1.3. A word of warning
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4.2. Building packages from source
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4.2.1. Requirements
|
|
|
|
4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
|
|
|
|
4.2.3. How to build and install
|
|
|
|
4.2.4. Selecting the compiler
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5. Creating binary packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5.1. Building a single binary package
|
|
|
|
5.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
|
|
|
|
5.3. Doing a bulk build of all packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5.3.1. Configuration
|
|
|
|
5.3.2. Other environmental considerations
|
|
|
|
5.3.3. Operation
|
|
|
|
5.3.4. What it does
|
|
|
|
5.3.5. Disk space requirements
|
|
|
|
5.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chroot'ed builds
|
|
|
|
5.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
5.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5.4. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5.4.1. Example of cdpack
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
6. Frequently Asked Questions
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-03-08 02:25:09 +01:00
|
|
|
6.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
6.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
|
|
|
|
6.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
|
|
|
|
6.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
|
2005-01-11 17:34:44 +01:00
|
|
|
6.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
6.6. How can I install/use XFree86 from pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
6.7. How can I install/use X.org from pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
6.8. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
|
|
|
|
6.9. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
|
|
|
|
6.10. How to fetch all distfiles at once
|
|
|
|
6.11. What does "Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc"
|
|
|
|
mean?
|
|
|
|
6.12. What does "Could not find bsd.own.mk" mean?
|
|
|
|
6.13. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
6.14. How do I change the location of configuration files?
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
6.15. Automated security checks
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
II. The pkgsrc developer's guide
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
7. Package components - files, directories and contents
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
7.1. Makefile
|
|
|
|
7.2. distinfo
|
|
|
|
7.3. patches/*
|
|
|
|
7.4. Other mandatory files
|
|
|
|
7.5. Optional files
|
|
|
|
7.6. work*
|
|
|
|
7.7. files/*
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
8. Programming in Makefiles
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
8.1. Makefile variables
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
8.1.1. Naming conventions
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.2. Code snippets
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.2.1. Adding things to a list
|
|
|
|
8.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
|
|
|
|
8.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
|
|
|
|
8.2.4. Quoting guideline
|
|
|
|
8.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
9. PLIST issues
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
9.1. RCS ID
|
|
|
|
9.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
|
|
|
|
9.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
|
|
|
|
9.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
|
|
|
|
9.5. Manpage-compression
|
|
|
|
9.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
|
|
|
|
9.7. Platform specific and differing PLISTs
|
|
|
|
9.8. Sharing directories between packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10. Buildlink methodology
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
|
|
|
|
10.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
|
|
|
|
10.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.3. Writing builtin.mk files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
|
|
|
|
10.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
11. The pkginstall framework
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
11.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
11.1.1. Directory manipulation
|
|
|
|
11.1.2. File manipulation
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
11.2. Configuration files
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
11.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
|
|
|
|
11.2.2. Telling the software were configuration files are
|
|
|
|
11.2.3. Patching installations
|
|
|
|
11.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
11.3. System startup scripts
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
11.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.4. System users and groups
|
|
|
|
11.5. System shells
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.5.1. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
12. Options handling
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
12.1. Global default options
|
|
|
|
12.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
13. The build process
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
13.1. Program location
|
|
|
|
13.2. Main targets
|
|
|
|
13.3. Other helpful targets
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
14. Notes on fixes for packages
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
14.1. General operation
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
14.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
|
|
|
|
14.1.2. Where to install documentation
|
|
|
|
14.1.3. Restricted packages
|
|
|
|
14.1.4. Handling dependencies
|
|
|
|
14.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
|
|
|
|
14.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
|
|
|
|
14.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
|
|
|
|
14.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
|
|
|
|
14.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
|
|
|
|
14.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an
|
2005-05-26 18:32:42 +02:00
|
|
|
existing package
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.11. Portability of packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.2. Possible downloading issues
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
downloading
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.3. Configuration gotchas
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
|
|
|
|
14.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
|
|
|
|
14.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.4. Building considerations
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.4.1. CPP defines
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5. Package specific actions
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.1. User interaction
|
|
|
|
14.5.2. Handling licenses
|
|
|
|
14.5.3. Installing score files
|
|
|
|
14.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts
|
|
|
|
14.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
|
|
|
|
14.5.6. Packages installing perl modules
|
|
|
|
14.5.7. Packages installing info files
|
|
|
|
14.5.8. Packages installing GConf2 data files
|
|
|
|
14.5.9. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
|
|
|
|
14.5.10. Packages installing X11 fonts
|
|
|
|
14.5.11. Packages installing GTK2 modules
|
|
|
|
14.5.12. Packages installing SGML or XML data
|
|
|
|
14.5.13. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
|
|
|
|
14.5.14. Packages using intltool
|
|
|
|
14.5.15. Packages installing startup scripts
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.6. Feedback to the author
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
15. Debugging
|
|
|
|
16. Submitting and Committing
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
16.1. Submitting your packages
|
|
|
|
16.2. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
|
|
|
|
16.3. Updating a package to a newer version
|
|
|
|
16.4. Moving a package in pkgsrc
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
A. A simple example package: bison
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
A.1. files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
A.1.1. Makefile
|
|
|
|
A.1.2. DESCR
|
|
|
|
A.1.3. PLIST
|
|
|
|
A.1.4. Checking a package with pkglint
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
A.2. Steps for building, installing, packaging
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
B. Build logs
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
B.1. Building figlet
|
|
|
|
B.2. Packaging figlet
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
C. Layout of the FTP server's package archive
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
D. Editing guidelines for the pkgsrc guide
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
D.1. Targets
|
|
|
|
D.2. Procedure
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Chapter 1. Introduction
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1.1. Introduction
|
|
|
|
1.2. Overview
|
|
|
|
1.3. Terminology
|
|
|
|
1.4. Typography
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1.1. Introduction
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There is a lot of software freely available for Unix based systems, which
|
|
|
|
usually runs on NetBSD and other Unix-flavoured systems, too, sometimes with
|
|
|
|
some modifications. The NetBSD Packages Collection (pkgsrc) incorporates any
|
|
|
|
such changes necessary to make that software run, and makes the installation
|
|
|
|
(and de-installation) of the software package easy by means of a single
|
|
|
|
command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Once the software has been built, it is manipulated with the pkg_* tools so
|
|
|
|
that installation and de-installation, printing of an inventory of all
|
|
|
|
installed packages and retrieval of one-line comments or more verbose
|
|
|
|
descriptions are all simple.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc currently contains several thousand packages, including:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* www/apache - The Apache web server
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* www/mozilla - The Mozilla web browser
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* meta-pkgs/gnome - The GNOME Desktop Environment
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* meta-pkgs/kde3 - The K Desktop Environment
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
...just to name a few.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc has built-in support for handling varying dependencies, such as pthreads
|
|
|
|
and X11, and extended features such as IPv6 support on a range of platforms.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc was derived from FreeBSD's ports system, and initially developed for
|
|
|
|
NetBSD only. Since then, pkgsrc has grown a lot, and now supports the following
|
|
|
|
platforms:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-11-02 14:29:15 +01:00
|
|
|
* DragonFlyBSD
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* FreeBSD
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-11-02 14:29:15 +01:00
|
|
|
* Microsoft Windows, via Interix
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* IRIX
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Linux
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* NetBSD (of course)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-02-10 12:30:00 +01:00
|
|
|
* Tru64 (Digital UNIX, OSF1)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* OpenBSD
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Solaris
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
1.2. Overview
|
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
This document is divided into two parts. The first, The pkgsrc user's guide,
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
describes how one can use one of the packages in the Package Collection, either
|
|
|
|
by installing a precompiled binary package, or by building one's own copy using
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
the NetBSD package system. The second part, The pkgsrc developer's guide,
|
|
|
|
explains how to prepare a package so it can be easily built by other NetBSD
|
|
|
|
users without knowing about the package's building details.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This document is available in various formats:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* HTML
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* PDF
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* PS
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* TXT
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
1.3. Terminology
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There has been a lot of talk about "ports", "packages", etc. so far. Here is a
|
|
|
|
description of all the terminology used within this document.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Package
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
A set of files and building instructions that describe what's necessary to
|
|
|
|
build a certain piece of software using pkgsrc. Packages are traditionally
|
|
|
|
stored under /usr/pkgsrc.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The NetBSD package system
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This is the former name of "pkgsrc". It is part of the NetBSD operating
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
system and can be bootstrapped to run on non-NetBSD operating systems as
|
|
|
|
well. It handles building (compiling), installing, and removing of
|
|
|
|
packages.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Distfile
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This term describes the file or files that are provided by the author of
|
|
|
|
the piece of software to distribute his work. All the changes necessary to
|
|
|
|
build on NetBSD are reflected in the corresponding package. Usually the
|
|
|
|
distfile is in the form of a compressed tar-archive, but other types are
|
|
|
|
possible, too. Distfiles are usually stored below /usr/pkgsrc/distfiles.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Port
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This is the term used by FreeBSD and OpenBSD people for what we call a
|
|
|
|
package. In NetBSD terminology, "port" refers to a different architecture.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Precompiled/binary package
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
A set of binaries built with pkgsrc from a distfile and stuffed together in
|
|
|
|
a single .tgz file so it can be installed on machines of the same machine
|
|
|
|
architecture without the need to recompile. Packages are usually generated
|
|
|
|
in /usr/pkgsrc/packages; there is also an archive on ftp.NetBSD.org.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Sometimes, this is referred to by the term "package" too, especially in the
|
|
|
|
context of precompiled packages.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Program
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The piece of software to be installed which will be constructed from all
|
|
|
|
the files in the Distfile by the actions defined in the corresponding
|
|
|
|
package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
1.4. Typography
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When giving examples for commands, shell prompts are used to show if the
|
|
|
|
command should/can be issued as root, or if "normal" user privileges are
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
sufficient. We use a # for root's shell prompt, and a % for users' shell
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
prompt, assuming they use the C-shell or tcsh.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
The pkgsrc user's guide
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Where to get pkgsrc
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2.1. As tar file
|
|
|
|
2.2. Via SUP
|
|
|
|
2.3. Via CVS
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. Using pkgsrc on systems other than NetBSD
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3.1. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
3.2. Platform specific notes
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3.2.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
|
|
|
3.2.2. FreeBSD
|
|
|
|
3.2.3. Interix
|
|
|
|
3.2.4. IRIX
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
3.2.5. Linux
|
|
|
|
3.2.6. OpenBSD
|
|
|
|
3.2.7. Solaris
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4. Using pkgsrc
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4.1. Working with binary packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4.1.1. Where to get binary packages
|
|
|
|
4.1.2. How to use binary packages
|
|
|
|
4.1.3. A word of warning
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4.2. Building packages from source
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4.2.1. Requirements
|
|
|
|
4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
|
|
|
|
4.2.3. How to build and install
|
|
|
|
4.2.4. Selecting the compiler
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5. Creating binary packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5.1. Building a single binary package
|
|
|
|
5.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
|
|
|
|
5.3. Doing a bulk build of all packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5.3.1. Configuration
|
|
|
|
5.3.2. Other environmental considerations
|
|
|
|
5.3.3. Operation
|
|
|
|
5.3.4. What it does
|
|
|
|
5.3.5. Disk space requirements
|
|
|
|
5.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chroot'ed builds
|
|
|
|
5.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
5.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5.4. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5.4.1. Example of cdpack
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
6. Frequently Asked Questions
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-03-08 02:25:09 +01:00
|
|
|
6.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
6.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
|
|
|
|
6.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
|
|
|
|
6.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
|
2005-01-11 17:34:44 +01:00
|
|
|
6.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
6.6. How can I install/use XFree86 from pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
6.7. How can I install/use X.org from pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
6.8. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
|
|
|
|
6.9. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
|
|
|
|
6.10. How to fetch all distfiles at once
|
|
|
|
6.11. What does "Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc" mean?
|
|
|
|
6.12. What does "Could not find bsd.own.mk" mean?
|
|
|
|
6.13. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
6.14. How do I change the location of configuration files?
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
6.15. Automated security checks
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Chapter 2. Where to get pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.1. As tar file
|
|
|
|
2.2. Via SUP
|
|
|
|
2.3. Via CVS
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are three ways to get pkgsrc. Either as a tar file, via SUP, or via CVS.
|
|
|
|
All three ways are described here.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.1. As tar file
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To get pkgsrc going, you need to get the pkgsrc.tar.gz file from ftp.NetBSD.org
|
|
|
|
and unpack it into /usr/pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.2. Via SUP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As an alternative to the tar file, you can get pkgsrc via the Software Update
|
|
|
|
Protocol, SUP. To do so, make sure your supfile has a line
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
release=pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
in it, see the examples in /usr/share/examples/supfiles, and that the /usr/
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc directory exists. Then, simply run sup -v /path/to/your/supfile.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.3. Via CVS
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
To get pkgsrc via CVS, make sure you have "cvs" installed. To do an initial
|
|
|
|
(full) checkout of pkgsrc, do the following steps:
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
% setenv CVSROOT anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot
|
|
|
|
% setenv CVS_RSH ssh
|
|
|
|
% cd /usr
|
|
|
|
% cvs checkout -P pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This will create the pkgsrc directory in your /usr, and all the package source
|
|
|
|
will be stored under /usr/pkgsrc. To update pkgsrc after the initial checkout,
|
|
|
|
make sure you have CVS_RSH set as above, then do:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
% cd /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
% cvs -q update -dP
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please also note that it is possible to have multiple copies of the pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
hierarchy in use at any one time - all work is done relatively within the
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc tree.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Chapter 3. Using pkgsrc on systems other than NetBSD
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.1. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
3.2. Platform specific notes
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3.2.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
|
|
|
3.2.2. FreeBSD
|
|
|
|
3.2.3. Interix
|
|
|
|
3.2.4. IRIX
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
3.2.5. Linux
|
|
|
|
3.2.6. OpenBSD
|
|
|
|
3.2.7. Solaris
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3.1. Bootstrapping pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
For operating systems other than NetBSD, we provide a bootstrap kit to build
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
the required tools to use pkgsrc on your platform. Besides support for native
|
|
|
|
NetBSD, pkgsrc and the bootstrap kit have support for the following operating
|
|
|
|
systems:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-01-16 03:33:52 +01:00
|
|
|
* DragonFlyBSD
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* FreeBSD
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Interix (Windows 2000, XP, 2003)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* IRIX
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Linux
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* OpenBSD
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Solaris
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-01-16 03:33:52 +01:00
|
|
|
* Tru64 (Digital UNIX/OSF1)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Support for other platforms is under development.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Installing the bootstrap kit should be as simple as:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# env CVS_RSH=ssh cvs -d anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot checkout pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
# cd pkgsrc/bootstrap
|
|
|
|
# ./bootstrap
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
See Chapter 2, Where to get pkgsrc for other ways to get pkgsrc before
|
|
|
|
bootstrapping. The given bootstrap command will use the defaults of /usr/pkg
|
|
|
|
for the prefix where programs will be installed in, and /var/db/pkg for the
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
package database directory where pkgsrc will do its internal bookkeeping.
|
|
|
|
However, these can also be set using command-line arguments.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Binary packages for the pkgsrc tools and an initial set of packages is
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
available for supported platforms. An up-to-date list of these can be found on
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
www.pkgsrc.org.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.2. Platform specific notes
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here are some platform-specific notes you should be aware of.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.2.1. Darwin (Mac OS X)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Darwin 5.x and 6.x are supported. There are two methods of using pkgsrc on Mac
|
|
|
|
OS X, by using a disk image, or a UFS partition.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Before you start, you will need to download and install the Mac OS X Developer
|
|
|
|
Tools from Apple's Developer Connection. See http://developer.apple.com/macosx/
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
for details. Also, make sure you install X11 for Mac OS X and the X11 SDK from
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
http://www.apple.com/macosx/x11/download/ if you intend to build packages that
|
|
|
|
use the X11 Window System.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you already have a UFS partition, or have a spare partition that you can
|
|
|
|
format as UFS, it is recommended to use that instead of the disk image. It'll
|
|
|
|
be somewhat faster and will mount automatically at boot time, where you must
|
|
|
|
manually mount a disk image.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You cannot use a HFS+ file system for pkgsrc, because pkgsrc currently requires
|
|
|
|
the filesystem to be case-sensitive, and HFS+ is not.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.2.1.1. Using a disk image
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Create the disk image:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# cd pkgsrc/bootstrap
|
|
|
|
# ./ufsdiskimage create ~/Documents/NetBSD 512 # megabytes - season to taste
|
|
|
|
# ./ufsdiskimage mount ~/Documents/NetBSD
|
|
|
|
# sudo chown `id -u`:`id -g` /Volumes/NetBSD
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
That's it!
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.2.1.2. Using a UFS partition
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
By default, /usr will be on your root file system, normally HFS+. It is
|
|
|
|
possible to use the default prefix of /usr/pkg by symlinking /usr/pkg to a
|
|
|
|
directory on a UFS file system. Obviously, another symlink is required if you
|
|
|
|
want to place the package database directory outside the prefix. e.g.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
# ./bootstrap --pkgdbdir /usr/pkg/pkgdb --pkgsrcdir /Volumes/ufs/pkgsrc
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you created your partitions at the time of installing Mac OS X and formatted
|
|
|
|
the target partition as UFS, it should automatically mount on /Volumes/<volume
|
|
|
|
name> when the machine boots. If you are (re)formatting a partition as UFS, you
|
|
|
|
need to ensure that the partition map correctly reflects "Apple_UFS" and not
|
|
|
|
"Apple_HFS".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The problem is that none of the disk tools will let you touch a disk that is
|
|
|
|
booted from. You can unmount the partition, but even if you newfs it, the
|
|
|
|
partition type will be incorrect and the automounter won't mount it. It can be
|
|
|
|
mounted manually, but it won't appear in Finder.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You'll need to boot off of the OS X Installation (User) CD. When the
|
|
|
|
Installation program starts, go up to the menu and select Disk Utility. Now,
|
|
|
|
you will be able to select the partition you want to be UFS, and Format it
|
|
|
|
Apple UFS. Quit the Disk Utility, quit the installer which will reboot your
|
|
|
|
machine. The new UFS file system will appear in Finder.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Be aware that the permissions on the new file system will be writable by root
|
|
|
|
only.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This note is as of 10.2 (Jaguar) and applies to earlier versions. Hopefully
|
|
|
|
Apple will fix Disk Utility in 10.3 (Panther).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.2.2. FreeBSD
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
FreeBSD 4.7 and 5.0 have been tested and are supported, other versions may
|
|
|
|
work.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Care should be taken so that the tools that this kit installs do not conflict
|
|
|
|
with the FreeBSD userland tools. There are several steps:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. FreeBSD stores its ports pkg database in /var/db/pkg. It is therefore
|
|
|
|
recommended that you choose a different location (e.g. /usr/pkgdb) by using
|
|
|
|
the --pkgdbdir option to the bootstrap script.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. If you do not intend to use the FreeBSD ports tools, it's probably a good
|
|
|
|
idea to move them out of the way to avoid confusion, e.g.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sbin
|
|
|
|
# mv pkg_add pkg_add.orig
|
|
|
|
# mv pkg_create pkg_create.orig
|
|
|
|
# mv pkg_delete pkg_delete.orig
|
|
|
|
# mv pkg_info pkg_info.orig
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. An example /etc/mk.conf file will be placed in /etc/mk.conf.example file
|
|
|
|
when you use the bootstrap script.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3.2.3. Interix
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Interix is a POSIX compatible subsystem for the Windows NT kernel, providing a
|
|
|
|
Unix-like environment with a tighter kernel integration than available with
|
|
|
|
Cygwin. It is part of the Windows Services for Unix package, available for free
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
for any licensed copy of Windows 2000, XP (not including XP Home), or 2003. SFU
|
|
|
|
can be downloaded from http://www.microsoft.com/windows/sfu/.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Services for Unix 3.5, current as of this writing, has been tested. 3.0 or 3.1
|
|
|
|
may work, but are not officially supported. (The main difference in 3.0/3.1 is
|
|
|
|
lack of pthreads.)
|
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
3.2.3.1. When installing Interix/SFU
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
At an absolute minimum, the following packages must be installed from the
|
|
|
|
Windows Services for Unix 3.5 distribution in order to use pkgsrc:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Utilities -> Base Utilities
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Interix GNU Components -> (all)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Remote Connectivity
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Interix SDK
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
When using pkgsrc on Interix, DO NOT install the Utilities subcomponent "UNIX
|
|
|
|
Perl". That is Perl 5.6 without shared module support, installed to /usr/local,
|
|
|
|
and will only cause confusion. Instead, install Perl 5.8 from pkgsrc (or from a
|
|
|
|
binary package).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Remote Connectivity subcomponent "Windows Remote Shell Service" does not
|
|
|
|
need to be installed, but Remote Connectivity itself should be installed in
|
|
|
|
order to have a working inetd.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Finally, during installation you may be asked whether to enable setuid behavior
|
|
|
|
for Interix programs, and whether to make pathnames default to case-sensitive.
|
|
|
|
Setuid should be enabled, and case-sensitivity MUST be enabled. (Without
|
|
|
|
case-sensitivity, a large number of packages including perl will not build.)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.2.3.2. What to do if Interix/SFU is already installed
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If SFU is already installed and you wish to alter these settings to work with
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc, note the following things.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* To uninstall UNIX Perl, use Add/Remove Programs, select Microsoft Windows
|
|
|
|
Services for UNIX, then click Change. In the installer, choose Add or
|
|
|
|
Remove, then uncheck Utilities->UNIX Perl.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* To enable case-sensitivity for the filesystem, run REGEDIT.EXE, and change
|
|
|
|
the following registry key:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session Manager\kernel
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Set the DWORD value "obcaseinsensitive" to 0; then reboot.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* To enable setuid binaries (optional), run REGEDIT.EXE, and change the
|
|
|
|
following registry key:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Services for UNIX
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Set the DWORD value "EnableSetuidBinaries" to 1; then reboot.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3.2.3.3. Important notes for using pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The package imanager (either the pkgsrc "su" user, or the user running
|
|
|
|
"pkg_add") must be a member of the local Administrators group. Such a user must
|
|
|
|
also be used to run the bootstrap. This is slightly relaxed from the normal
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc requirement of "root".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The package manager should use a umask of 002. "make install" will
|
|
|
|
automatically complain if this is not the case. This ensures that directories
|
|
|
|
written in /var/db/pkg are Administrators-group writeable.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The popular Interix binary packages from http://www.interopsystems.com/ use an
|
|
|
|
older version of pkgsrc's pkg_* tools. Ideally, these should NOT be used in
|
|
|
|
conjunction with pkgsrc. If you choose to use them at the same time as the
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc packages, ensure that you use the proper pkg_* tools for each type of
|
|
|
|
binary package.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
The TERM setting used for DOS-type console windows (including those invoked by
|
|
|
|
the csh and ksh startup shortcuts) is "interix". Most systems don't have a
|
|
|
|
termcap/terminfo entry for it, but the following .termcap entry provides
|
|
|
|
adequate emulation in most cases:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
interix:kP=\E[S:kN=\E[T:kH=\E[U:dc@:DC@:tc=pcansi:
|
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3.2.4. IRIX
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You will need a working C compiler, either gcc or SGI's MIPS and MIPSpro
|
|
|
|
compiler (cc/c89). Please set the CC environment variable according to your
|
|
|
|
preference. If you do not have a license for the MIPSpro compiler suite, you
|
|
|
|
can download a gcc tardist file from http://freeware.sgi.com/.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that you will need IRIX 6.5.17 or higher, as this is the earliest
|
|
|
|
version of IRIX providing support for if_indextoname(3), if_nametoindex(3),
|
|
|
|
etc.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
At this point in time, pkgsrc only supports one ABI at a time. That is, you can
|
|
|
|
not switch between the old 32-bit ABI, the new 32-bit ABI and the 64-bit ABI.
|
|
|
|
If you start out using "abi=n32", that's what all your packages will be built
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
with.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Therefore, please make sure that you have no conflicting CFLAGS in your
|
|
|
|
environment or the /etc/mk.conf. Particularly, make sure that you do not try to
|
|
|
|
link n32 object files with lib64 or vice versa. Check your /etc/
|
|
|
|
compiler.defaults!
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have the actual pkgsrc tree mounted via NFS from a different host,
|
|
|
|
please make sure to set WRKOBJDIR to a local directory, as it appears that IRIX
|
|
|
|
linker occasionally runs into issues when trying to link over a network mounted
|
|
|
|
filesystem.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The bootstrapping process should set all the right options for programs such as
|
|
|
|
imake(1), but you may want to set some options depending on your local setup.
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
Please see pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf and, of course, your compiler's man pages
|
2004-12-24 00:38:58 +01:00
|
|
|
for details.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
If you are using SGI's MIPSPro compiler, please set
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER=mipspro
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
in /etc/mk.conf. Otherwise, pkgsrc will assume you are using gcc and may end up
|
|
|
|
passing invalid flags to the compiler. Note that bootstrap should create an
|
|
|
|
appropriate mk.conf.example by default.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have both the MIPSPro compiler chain installed as well as gcc, but want
|
|
|
|
to make sure that MIPRPro is used, please set your PATH to not include the
|
|
|
|
location of gcc (often /usr/freeware/bin), and (important) pass the
|
|
|
|
'--preserve-path' flag.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.2.5. Linux
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some versions of Linux (for example Debian GNU/Linux) need either libtermcap or
|
|
|
|
libcurses (libncurses). Installing the distributions libncurses-dev package (or
|
|
|
|
equivalent) should fix the problem.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc supports both gcc (GNU Compiler Collection) and icc (Intel C++
|
|
|
|
Compiler). gcc is the default. icc 8.0 and 8.1 on i386 have been tested.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To bootstrap using icc, assuming the default icc installation directory:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
env CC=/opt/intel_cc_80/bin/icc LDFLAGS=-static-libcxa \
|
|
|
|
ac_cv___attribute__=yes ./bootstrap
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
icc 8.1 needs the `-i-static' argument instead of -static-libcxa.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
icc supports __attribute__, but the GNU configure test uses a nested function,
|
|
|
|
which icc does not support. #undef'ing __attribute__ has the unfortunate
|
|
|
|
side-effect of breaking many of the Linux header files, which cannot be
|
|
|
|
compiled properly without __attribute__. The test must be overridden so that
|
|
|
|
__attribute__ is assumed supported by the compiler.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
After bootstrapping, you should set PKGSRC_COMPILER in /etc/mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER=icc
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default installation directory for icc is /opt/intel_cc_80, which is also
|
|
|
|
the pkgsrc default. If you have installed it into a different directory, set
|
|
|
|
ICCBASE in /etc/mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ICCBASE=/opt/icc
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc uses the static linking method of the runtime libraries provided by icc,
|
|
|
|
so binaries can be run on other systems which do not have the shared libraries
|
|
|
|
installed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Libtool, however, extracts a list of libraries from the ld(1) command run when
|
|
|
|
linking a C++ shared library and records it, throwing away the -Bstatic and
|
|
|
|
-Bdynamic options interspersed between the libraries. This means that
|
|
|
|
libtool-linked C++ shared libraries will have a runtime dependency on the icc
|
|
|
|
libraries until this is fixed in libtool.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.2.6. OpenBSD
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
OpenBSD 3.0 and 3.2 are tested and supported.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Care should be taken so that the tools that this kit installs do not conflict
|
|
|
|
with the OpenBSD userland tools. There are several steps:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. OpenBSD stores its ports pkg database in /var/db/pkg. It is therefore
|
|
|
|
recommended that you choose a different location (e.g. /usr/pkgdb) by using
|
|
|
|
the --pkgdbdir option to the bootstrap script.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. If you do not intend to use the OpenBSD ports tools, it's probably a good
|
|
|
|
idea to move them out of the way to avoid confusion, e.g.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sbin
|
|
|
|
# mv pkg_add pkg_add.orig
|
|
|
|
# mv pkg_create pkg_create.orig
|
|
|
|
# mv pkg_delete pkg_delete.orig
|
|
|
|
# mv pkg_info pkg_info.orig
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. An example /etc/mk.conf file will be placed in /etc/mk.conf.example file
|
|
|
|
when you use the bootstrap script. OpenBSD's make program uses /etc/mk.conf
|
|
|
|
as well. You can work around this by enclosing all the pkgsrc specific
|
|
|
|
parts of the file with:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
.ifdef BSD_PKG_MK
|
2004-12-24 00:38:58 +01:00
|
|
|
# pkgsrc stuff, e.g. insert defaults/mk.conf or similar here
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
.else
|
|
|
|
# OpenBSD stuff
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
3.2.7. Solaris
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Solaris 2.6 through 9 are supported on both x86 and sparc. You will need a
|
|
|
|
working C compiler. Both gcc 2.95.3 and Sun WorkShop 5 have been tested.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following packages are required on Solaris 8 for the bootstrap process and
|
|
|
|
to build packages.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* SUNWsprot
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* SUNWarc
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* SUNWbtool
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* SUNWtoo
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* SUNWlibm
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Please note the use of GNU binutils on Solaris is not supported.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
3.2.7.1. If you are using gcc
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
It makes life much simpler if you only use the same gcc consistently for
|
|
|
|
building all packages.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is recommended that an external gcc be used only for bootstrapping, then
|
|
|
|
either build gcc from lang/gcc or install a binary gcc package, then remove gcc
|
|
|
|
used during bootstrapping.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Binary packages of gcc can be found through http://www.sun.com/bigadmin/common/
|
|
|
|
freewareSearch.html.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
3.2.7.2. If you are using Sun WorkShop
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You will need at least the following packages installed (from WorkShop 5.0)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* SPROcc - Sun WorkShop Compiler C 5.0
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* SPROcpl - Sun WorkShop Compiler C++ 5.0
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* SPROild - Sun WorkShop Incremental Linker
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* SPROlang - Sun WorkShop Compilers common components
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
You should set CC, CXX and optionally, CPP in /etc/mk.conf, eg.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
CC= cc
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
CXX= CC
|
|
|
|
CPP= /usr/ccs/lib/cpp
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may also want to build 64-bit binaries, eg.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CFLAGS= -xtarget=ultra -xarch=v9
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Whichever compiler you use, please ensure the compiler tools and your $prefix
|
|
|
|
are in your PATH. This includes /usr/ccs/{bin,lib} and eg. /usr/pkg/{bin,sbin}.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Chapter 4. Using pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.1. Working with binary packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4.1.1. Where to get binary packages
|
|
|
|
4.1.2. How to use binary packages
|
|
|
|
4.1.3. A word of warning
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4.2. Building packages from source
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4.2.1. Requirements
|
|
|
|
4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
|
|
|
|
4.2.3. How to build and install
|
|
|
|
4.2.4. Selecting the compiler
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4.1. Working with binary packages
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This section describes how to find, retrieve and install a precompiled binary
|
|
|
|
package that someone else already prepared for your type of machine.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.1.1. Where to get binary packages
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Precompiled packages are stored on ftp.NetBSD.org and its mirrors in the
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
directory /pub/NetBSD/packages/<OSVERSION>/<ARCH>/ for anonymous FTP access.
|
|
|
|
OSVERSION is the NetBSD version (uname -r), ARCH is the architecture (uname -p
|
|
|
|
). In that directory, there is a subdirectory for each category plus a
|
|
|
|
subdirectory All which includes the actual binaries in .tgz files. The category
|
|
|
|
subdirectories use symbolic links to those files (this is the same directory
|
|
|
|
layout as in /usr/pkgsrc/packages).
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This same directory layout applies for CDROM distributions, only that the
|
|
|
|
directory may be rooted somewhere else, probably somewhere below /cdrom. Please
|
|
|
|
consult your CDROMs documentation for the exact location.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.1.2. How to use binary packages
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
If you have the files on a CDROM or downloaded them to your hard disk, you can
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
install them with the following command (be sure to su to root first):
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# pkg_add /path/to/package.tgz
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have FTP access and you don't want to download the packages via FTP
|
|
|
|
prior to installation, you can do this automatically by giving pkg_add an FTP
|
|
|
|
URL:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
# pkg_add ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/<OSVERSION>/<ARCH>/All/package.tgz
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
Note that any prerequisite packages needed to run the package in question will
|
|
|
|
be installed, too, assuming they are present where you install from.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
To save some typing, you can set the PKG_PATH environment variable to a
|
|
|
|
semicolon separated list of paths (including remote URLs); trailing slashes are
|
|
|
|
not allowed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Additionally to the All directory there exists a vulnerable directory to which
|
|
|
|
binary packages with known vulnerabilities are moved, since removing them could
|
|
|
|
cause missing dependencies. To use these packages, add the vulnerable directory
|
|
|
|
to your PKG_PATH. However, you should run security/audit-packages regularly,
|
|
|
|
and especially after installing new packages, and verify that the
|
|
|
|
vulnerabilities are acceptable for your configuration. An example PKG_PATH
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
would be: ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/<OSVERSION>/<ARCH>/All;ftp:/
|
|
|
|
/ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/<OSVERSION>/<ARCH>/vulnerable Please note
|
|
|
|
that semicolon (';') is a shell meta-character, so you'll probably have to
|
|
|
|
quote it.
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
After you've installed packages, be sure to have /usr/pkg/bin and /usr/pkg/sbin
|
|
|
|
in your PATH so you can actually start the just installed program.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.1.3. A word of warning
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please pay very careful attention to the warnings expressed in the pkg_add(1)
|
|
|
|
manual page about the inherent dangers of installing binary packages which you
|
|
|
|
did not create yourself, and the security holes that can be introduced onto
|
|
|
|
your system by indiscriminate adding of such files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2. Building packages from source
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This assumes that the package is already in pkgsrc. If it is not, see Part II,
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
"The pkgsrc developer's guide" for instructions how to create your own
|
|
|
|
packages.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.1. Requirements
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To build packages from source on a NetBSD system the "comp" and the "text"
|
|
|
|
distribution sets must be installed. If you want to build X11 related packages
|
|
|
|
the "xbase" and "xcomp" distribution sets are required, too.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.2. Fetching distfiles
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
The first step for building a package is downloading the distfiles (i.e. the
|
|
|
|
unmodified source). If they have not yet been downloaded, pkgsrc will fetch
|
|
|
|
them automatically.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can overwrite some of the major distribution sites to fit to sites that are
|
2004-12-24 00:38:58 +01:00
|
|
|
close to your own. Have a look at pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf to find some
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
examples ? in particular, look for the MASTER_SORT, MASTER_SORT_REGEX and
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
INET_COUNTRY definitions. This may save some of your bandwidth and time.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can change these settings either in your shell's environment, or, if you
|
|
|
|
want to keep the settings, by editing the /etc/mk.conf file, and adding the
|
|
|
|
definitions there.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you don't have a permanent Internet connection and you want to know which
|
|
|
|
files to download, make fetch-list will tell you what you'll need. Put these
|
|
|
|
distfiles into /usr/pkgsrc/distfiles.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.3. How to build and install
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assuming that the distfile has been fetched (see previous section), become root
|
|
|
|
and change into the relevant directory and running make. For example, type
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
% cd misc/figlet
|
|
|
|
% make
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
at the shell prompt to build the various components of the package, and
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# make install
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
to install the various components into the correct places on your system.
|
|
|
|
Installing the package on your system requires you to be root. However, pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
has a just-in-time-su feature, which allows you to only become root for the
|
|
|
|
actual installation step
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Taking the figlet utility as an example, we can install it on our system by
|
|
|
|
building as shown in Appendix B, Build logs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The program is installed under the default root of the packages tree - /usr/
|
|
|
|
pkg. Should this not conform to your tastes, set the LOCALBASE variable in your
|
|
|
|
environment, and it will use that value as the root of your packages tree. So,
|
|
|
|
to use /usr/local, set LOCALBASE=/usr/local in your environment. Please note
|
|
|
|
that you should use a directory which is dedicated to packages and not shared
|
|
|
|
with other programs (ie, do not try and use LOCALBASE=/usr). Also, you should
|
|
|
|
not try to add any of your own files or directories (such as src/, obj/, or
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc/) below the LOCALBASE tree. This is to prevent possible conflicts
|
|
|
|
between programs and other files installed by the package system and whatever
|
|
|
|
else may have been installed there.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some packages look in /etc/mk.conf to alter some configuration options at build
|
2004-12-24 00:38:58 +01:00
|
|
|
time. Have a look at pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf to get an overview of what will
|
|
|
|
be set there by default. Environment variables such as LOCALBASE can be set in
|
|
|
|
/etc/mk.conf to save having to remember to set them each time you want to use
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Occasionally, people want to "look under the covers" to see what is going on
|
|
|
|
when a package is building or being installed. This may be for debugging
|
|
|
|
purposes, or out of simple curiosity. A number of utility values have been
|
|
|
|
added to help with this.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. If you invoke the make(1) command with PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL=2, then a huge
|
|
|
|
amount of information will be displayed. For example,
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
make patch PKG_DEBUG_LEVEL=2
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
will show all the commands that are invoked, up to and including the
|
|
|
|
"patch" stage.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. If you want to know the value of a certain make(1) definition, then the
|
|
|
|
VARNAME definition should be used, in conjunction with the show-var target.
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
e.g. to show the expansion of the make(1) variable LOCALBASE:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
% make show-var VARNAME=LOCALBASE
|
|
|
|
/usr/pkg
|
|
|
|
%
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you want to install a binary package that you've either created yourself
|
|
|
|
(see next section), that you put into pkgsrc/packages manually or that is
|
2004-12-01 10:52:59 +01:00
|
|
|
located on a remote FTP server, you can use the "bin-install" target. This
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
target will install a binary package - if available - via pkg_add(1), else do a
|
|
|
|
make package. The list of remote FTP sites searched is kept in the variable
|
2004-12-24 00:38:58 +01:00
|
|
|
BINPKG_SITES, which defaults to ftp.NetBSD.org. Any flags that should be added
|
|
|
|
to pkg_add(1) can be put into BIN_INSTALL_FLAGS. See pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf
|
|
|
|
for more details.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A final word of warning: If you setup a system that has a non-standard setting
|
|
|
|
for LOCALBASE, be sure to set that before any packages are installed, as you
|
|
|
|
can not use several directories for the same purpose. Doing so will result in
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc not being able to properly detect your installed packages, and fail
|
|
|
|
miserably. Note also that precompiled binary packages are usually built with
|
|
|
|
the default LOCALBASE of /usr/pkg, and that you should not install any if you
|
|
|
|
use a non-standard LOCALBASE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.4. Selecting the compiler
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
By default, pkgsrc will use GCC to build packages. This may be overridden by
|
|
|
|
setting the following variables in /etc/mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This is a list of values specifying the chain of compilers to invoke when
|
|
|
|
building packages. Valid values are:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* distcc: distributed C/C++ (chainable)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* ccache: compiler cache (chainable)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* gcc: GNU C/C++ Compiler
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* mipspro: Silicon Graphics, Inc. MIPSpro (n32/n64)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* mipspro: Silicon Graphics, Inc. MIPSpro (o32)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* sunpro: Microsystems, Inc. WorkShip/Forte/Sun ONE Studio
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The default is "gcc". You can use ccache and/or distcc with an appropriate
|
|
|
|
PKGSRC_COMPILER setting, e.g. "ccache gcc". This variable should always be
|
|
|
|
terminated with a value for a real compiler.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
GCC_REQD:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This specifies the minimum version of GCC to use when building packages. If
|
|
|
|
the system GCC doesn't satisfy this requirement, then pkgsrc will build and
|
|
|
|
install one of the GCC packages to use instead.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Chapter 5. Creating binary packages
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.1. Building a single binary package
|
|
|
|
5.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
|
|
|
|
5.3. Doing a bulk build of all packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5.3.1. Configuration
|
|
|
|
5.3.2. Other environmental considerations
|
|
|
|
5.3.3. Operation
|
|
|
|
5.3.4. What it does
|
|
|
|
5.3.5. Disk space requirements
|
|
|
|
5.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chroot'ed builds
|
|
|
|
5.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
5.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5.4. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5.4.1. Example of cdpack
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5.1. Building a single binary package
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Once you have built and installed a package, you can create a binary package
|
|
|
|
which can be installed on another system with pkg_add(1) This saves having to
|
|
|
|
build the same package on a group of hosts and wasting CPU time. It also
|
|
|
|
provides a simple means for others to install your package, should you
|
|
|
|
distribute it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To create a binary package, change into the appropriate directory in pkgsrc,
|
|
|
|
and run make package:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# cd misc/figlet
|
|
|
|
# make package
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This will build and install your package (if not already done), and then build
|
|
|
|
a binary package from what was installed. You can then use the pkg_* tools to
|
|
|
|
manipulate it. Binary packages are created by default in /usr/pkgsrc/packages,
|
|
|
|
in the form of a gzipped tar file. See Section B.2, "Packaging figlet" for a
|
|
|
|
continuation of the above misc/figlet example.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
See Chapter 16, Submitting and Committing for information on how to submit such
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
a binary package.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
See Section 13.3, "Other helpful targets".
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.3. Doing a bulk build of all packages
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you want to get a full set of precompiled binary packages, this section
|
|
|
|
describes how to get them. Beware that the bulk build will remove all currently
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
installed packages from your system! Having an FTP server configured either on
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
the machine doing the bulk builds or on a nearby NFS server can help to make
|
|
|
|
the packages available to everyone. See ftpd(8) for more information. If you
|
|
|
|
use a remote NFS server's storage, be sure to not actually compile on NFS
|
|
|
|
storage, as this slows things down a lot.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.3.1. Configuration
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.3.1.1. /etc/mk.conf
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
You may want to set variables in /etc/mk.conf. Look at pkgsrc/mk/defaults/
|
|
|
|
mk.conf for details of the default settings. You will want to ensure that
|
2004-12-24 00:38:58 +01:00
|
|
|
ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES meet your local policy. As used in this example,
|
|
|
|
_ACCEPTABLE=yes accepts all licenses.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PACKAGES?= ${_PKGSRCDIR}/packages/${MACHINE_ARCH}
|
|
|
|
WRKOBJDIR?= /usr/tmp/pkgsrc # build here instead of in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
BSDSRCDIR= /usr/src
|
|
|
|
BSDXSRCDIR= /usr/xsrc # for x11/xservers
|
|
|
|
OBJHOSTNAME?= yes # use work.`hostname`
|
|
|
|
FAILOVER_FETCH= yes # insist on the correct checksum
|
|
|
|
PKG_DEVELOPER?= yes
|
|
|
|
_ACCEPTABLE= yes
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.3.1.2. build.conf
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In pkgsrc/mk/bulk, copy build.conf-example to build.conf and edit it, following
|
|
|
|
the comments in that file. This is the config file that determines where log
|
|
|
|
files are generated after the build, where to mail the build report to, where
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
your pkgsrc tree is located and the user to which user to su(8) to do a cvs
|
|
|
|
update.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-24 14:45:19 +02:00
|
|
|
5.3.1.3. pre-build.local
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is possible to configure the bulk build to perform certain site specific
|
|
|
|
tasks at the end of the pre-build stage. If the file pre-build.local exists in
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
/usr/pkgsrc/mk/bulk, it will be executed (as a sh(1) script) at the end of the
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
usual pre-build stage. An example use of pre-build.local is to have the line:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# echo "I do not have enough disk space to build this pig." \
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
> pkgsrc/misc/openoffice/$BROKENF
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
to prevent the system from trying to build a particular package which requires
|
|
|
|
nearly 3 GB of disk space.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.3.2. Other environmental considerations
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As /usr/pkg will be completely deleted at the start of bulk builds, make sure
|
|
|
|
your login shell is placed somewhere else. Either drop it into /usr/local/bin
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
(and adjust your login shell in the passwd file), or (re-)install it via
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
pkg_add(1) from /etc/rc.local, so you can login after a reboot (remember that
|
|
|
|
your current process won't die if the package is removed, you just can't start
|
|
|
|
any new instances of the shell any more). Also, if you use NetBSD earlier than
|
|
|
|
1.5, or you still want to use the pkgsrc version of ssh for some reason, be
|
|
|
|
sure to install ssh before starting it from rc.local:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
( cd /usr/pkgsrc/security/ssh ; make bulk-install )
|
|
|
|
if [ -f /usr/pkg/etc/rc.d/sshd ]; then
|
|
|
|
/usr/pkg/etc/rc.d/sshd
|
|
|
|
fi
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Not doing so will result in you being not able to log in via ssh after the bulk
|
|
|
|
build is finished or if the machine gets rebooted or crashes. You have been
|
|
|
|
warned! :)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.3.3. Operation
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Make sure you don't need any of the packages still installed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Warning
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
During the bulk build, all packages will be removed!
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Be sure to remove all other things that might interfere with builds, like some
|
|
|
|
libs installed in /usr/local, etc. then become root and type:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
# sh mk/bulk/build
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If for some reason your last build didn't complete (power failure, system
|
|
|
|
panic, ...), you can continue it by running:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# sh mk/bulk/build restart
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
At the end of the bulk build, you will get a summary via mail, and find build
|
|
|
|
logs in the directory specified by FTP in the build.conf file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.3.4. What it does
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The bulk builds consist of three steps:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. pre-build
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The script updates your pkgsrc tree via (anon)cvs, then cleans out any
|
|
|
|
broken distfiles, and removes all packages installed.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. the bulk build
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This is basically "make bulk-package" with an optimised order in which
|
|
|
|
packages will be built. Packages that don't require other packages will be
|
|
|
|
built first, and packages with many dependencies will be built later.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. post-build
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Generates a report that's placed in the directory specified in the
|
|
|
|
build.conf file named broken.html, a short version of that report will also
|
|
|
|
be mailed to the build's admin.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
During the build, a list of broken packages will be compiled in /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
/.broken (or .../.broken.${MACHINE} if OBJMACHINE is set), individual build
|
|
|
|
logs of broken builds can be found in the package's directory. These files are
|
|
|
|
used by the bulk-targets to mark broken builds to not waste time trying to
|
|
|
|
rebuild them, and they can be used to debug these broken package builds later.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.3.5. Disk space requirements
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Currently, roughly the following requirements are valid for NetBSD 2.0/i386:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* 10 GB - distfiles (NFS ok)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* 8 GB - full set of all binaries (NFS ok)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* 5 GB - temp space for compiling (local disk recommended)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Note that all pkgs will be de-installed as soon as they are turned into a
|
|
|
|
binary package, and that sources are removed, so there is no excessively huge
|
|
|
|
demand to disk space. Afterwards, if the package is needed again, it will be
|
|
|
|
installed via pkg_add(1) instead of building again, so there are no cycles
|
|
|
|
wasted by recompiling.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.3.6. Setting up a sandbox for chroot'ed builds
|
|
|
|
|
2005-01-05 15:22:27 +01:00
|
|
|
If you don't want all the packages nuked from a machine (rendering it useless
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
for anything but pkg compiling), there is the possibility of doing the package
|
|
|
|
bulk build inside a chroot environment.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-01-05 15:22:27 +01:00
|
|
|
The first step is to set up a chroot sandbox, e.g. /usr/sandbox. This can be
|
|
|
|
done by using null mounts, or manually.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There is a shell script called pkgsrc/mk/bulk/mksandbox which will set up the
|
|
|
|
sandbox environment using null mounts. It will also create a script called
|
|
|
|
sandbox in the root of the sandbox environment, which will allow the null
|
|
|
|
mounts to be activated using the sandbox mount command and deactivated using
|
|
|
|
the sandbox umount command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To set up a sandbox environment by hand, after extracting all the sets from a
|
|
|
|
NetBSD installation or doing a make distribution DESTDIR=/usr/sandbox in /usr/
|
|
|
|
src/etc, be sure the following items are present and properly configured:
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Kernel
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# cp /netbsd /usr/sandbox
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. /dev/*
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sandbox/dev ; sh MAKEDEV all
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. /etc/resolv.conf (for security/smtpd and mail):
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# cp /etc/resolv.conf /usr/sandbox/etc
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4. Working(!) mail config (hostname, sendmail.cf):
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# cp /etc/mail/sendmail.cf /usr/sandbox/etc/mail
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5. /etc/localtime (for security/smtpd):
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# ln -sf /usr/share/zoneinfo/UTC /usr/sandbox/etc/localtime
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
6. /usr/src (system sources, for sysutils/aperture, net/ppp-mppe):
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# ln -s ../disk1/cvs .
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
# ln -s cvs/src-2.0 src
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
7. Create /var/db/pkg (not part of default install):
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# mkdir /usr/sandbox/var/db/pkg
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
8. Create /usr/pkg (not part of default install):
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# mkdir /usr/sandbox/usr/pkg
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
9. Checkout pkgsrc via cvs into /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sandbox/usr
|
|
|
|
# cvs -d anoncvs@anoncvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot checkout -d -P pkgsrc
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Do not mount/link this to the copy of your pkgsrc tree you do development
|
|
|
|
in, as this will likely cause problems!
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
10. Make /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc/packages and .../distfiles point somewhere
|
|
|
|
appropriate. NFS- and/or nullfs-mounts may come in handy!
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
11. Edit /etc/mk.conf, see Section 5.3.1.1, "/etc/mk.conf".
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
12. Adjust mk/bulk/build.conf to suit your needs.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
13. If you have set CVS_USER in build.conf, make sure that account exists and
|
|
|
|
can do a cvs ${CVS_FLAGS} update properly!
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
When the chroot sandbox is setup, you can start the build with the following
|
|
|
|
steps:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
# sh mk/bulk/do-sandbox-build
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This will just jump inside the sandbox and start building. At the end of the
|
|
|
|
build, mail will be sent with the results of the build. Created binary pkgs
|
|
|
|
will be in /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc/packages (wherever that points/mounts to/
|
|
|
|
from).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.3.7. Building a partial set of packages
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In addition to building a complete set of all packages in pkgsrc, the pkgsrc/mk
|
|
|
|
/bulk/build script may be used to build a subset of the packages contained in
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc. By setting defining SPECIFIC_PKGS in /etc/mk.conf, the variables
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* SITE_SPECIFIC_PKGS
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* HOST_SPECIFIC_PKGS
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* GROUP_SPECIFIC_PKGS
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* USER_SPECIFIC_PKGS
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
will define the set of packages which should be built. The bulk build code will
|
|
|
|
also include any packages which are needed as dependencies for the explicitly
|
|
|
|
listed packages.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
One use of this is to do a bulk build with SPECIFIC_PKGS in a chroot sandbox
|
|
|
|
periodically to have a complete set of the binary packages needed for your site
|
|
|
|
available without the overhead of building extra packages that are not needed.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
5.3.8. Uploading results of a bulk build
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This section describes how pkgsrc developers can upload binary pkgs built by
|
|
|
|
bulk builds to ftp.NetBSD.org.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-02-10 12:30:00 +01:00
|
|
|
If you would like to automatically create checksum files for the binary
|
|
|
|
packages you intend to upload, remember to set MKSUMS=yes in your mk/bulk/
|
|
|
|
build.conf.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you would like to PGP sign the checksum files (highly recommended!),
|
|
|
|
remember to set SIGN_AS=username@NetBSD.org in your mk/bulk/build.conf. This
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
will prompt you for your GPG password to sign the files before uploading
|
2005-02-10 12:30:00 +01:00
|
|
|
everything.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Then, make sure that you have RSYNC_DST set properly in your mk/bulk/build.conf
|
|
|
|
file, i.e. adjust it to something like one of the following:
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
RSYNC_DST=$CVS_USER@ftp.NetBSD.org:/pub/NetBSD/packages/pkgsrc-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch/upload
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
Please use appropviate values for "pkgsrc-200xQy", "NetBSD-a.b.c" and "arch"
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
here. If your login on ftp.NetBSD.org is different from CVS_USER, write your
|
|
|
|
login directly into the variable, e.g. my local account is "feyrer", but for my
|
|
|
|
login "hubertf", I use:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
RSYNC_DST=hubertf@ftp.NetBSD.org:/pub/NetBSD/packages/pkgsrc-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch/upload
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A separate upload directory is used here to allow "closing" the directory
|
|
|
|
during upload. To do so, run the following command on ftp.NetBSD.org next:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
nbftp% mkdir -p -m 750 /pub/NetBSD/packages/pkgsrc-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch/upload
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that /pub/NetBSD/packages is only appropriate for packages for the
|
|
|
|
NetBSD operating system. Binary packages for other operating systems should go
|
|
|
|
into /pub/pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
Before uploading the binary pkgs, ssh authentication needs to be set up. This
|
|
|
|
example shows how to setup temporary keys for the root account inside the
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
sandbox (assuming that no keys should be present there usually):
|
|
|
|
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
# chroot /usr/sandbox
|
|
|
|
chroot-# rm $HOME/.ssh/id-dsa*
|
|
|
|
chroot-# ssh-keygen -t dsa
|
|
|
|
chroot-# cat $HOME/.ssh/id-dsa.pub
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Now take the output of id-dsa.pub and append it to your ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
|
2005-02-10 12:30:00 +01:00
|
|
|
file on ftp.NetBSD.org. You can remove the key after the upload is done!
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Next, test if your ssh connection really works:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
chroot-# ssh ftp.NetBSD.org date
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Use "-l yourNetBSDlogin" here as appropriate!
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Now after all this works, you can exit the sandbox and start the upload:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
chroot-# exit
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/sandbox/usr/pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
# sh mk/bulk/do-sandbox-upload
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-08 15:57:08 +02:00
|
|
|
The upload process may take quite some time. Use ls(1) or du(1) on the FTP
|
|
|
|
server to monitor progress of the upload. The upload script will take care of
|
|
|
|
not uploading restricted packages and putting vulnerable packages into the
|
|
|
|
vulnerable subdirectory.
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
After the upload has ended, first thing is to revoke ssh access:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
nbftp% vi ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
Gdd:x!
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Use whatever is needed to remove the key you've entered before! Last, move the
|
|
|
|
uploaded packages out of the upload directory to have them accessible to
|
|
|
|
everyone:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
nbftp% cd /pub/NetBSD/packages/pkgsrc-200xQy/NetBSD-a.b.c/arch
|
|
|
|
nbftp% mv upload/* .
|
|
|
|
nbftp% rmdir upload
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
nbftp% chmod 755 .
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5.4. Creating a multiple CD-ROM packages collection
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
After your pkgsrc bulk-build has completed, you may wish to create a CD-ROM set
|
|
|
|
of the resulting binary packages to assist in installing packages on other
|
|
|
|
machines. The pkgtools/cdpack package provides a simple tool for creating the
|
|
|
|
ISO 9660 images. cdpack arranges the packages on the CD-ROMs in a way that
|
|
|
|
keeps all the dependencies for given package on the same CD as that package.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.4.1. Example of cdpack
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Complete documentation for cdpack is found in the cdpack(1) manpage. The
|
|
|
|
following short example assumes that the binary packages are left in /usr/
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc/packages/All and that sufficient disk space exists in /u2 to hold the
|
|
|
|
ISO 9660 images.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# mkdir /u2/images
|
|
|
|
# pkg_add /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All/cdpack
|
|
|
|
# cdpack /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All /u2/images
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you wish to include a common set of files (COPYRIGHT, README, etc.) on each
|
|
|
|
CD in the collection, then you need to create a directory which contains these
|
|
|
|
files. e.g.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# mkdir /tmp/common
|
|
|
|
# echo "This is a README" > /tmp/common/README
|
|
|
|
# echo "Another file" > /tmp/common/COPYING
|
|
|
|
# mkdir /tmp/common/bin
|
|
|
|
# echo "#!/bin/sh" > /tmp/common/bin/myscript
|
|
|
|
# echo "echo Hello world" >> /tmp/common/bin/myscript
|
|
|
|
# chmod 755 /tmp/common/bin/myscript
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Now create the images:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# cdpack -x /tmp/common /usr/pkgsrc/packages/All /u2/images
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Each image will contain README, COPYING, and bin/myscript in their root
|
|
|
|
directories.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Chapter 6. Frequently Asked Questions
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
2005-03-08 02:25:09 +01:00
|
|
|
6.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
6.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
|
|
|
|
6.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
|
|
|
|
6.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
|
2005-01-11 17:34:44 +01:00
|
|
|
6.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
6.6. How can I install/use XFree86 from pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
6.7. How can I install/use X.org from pkgsrc?
|
|
|
|
6.8. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
|
|
|
|
6.9. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
|
|
|
|
6.10. How to fetch all distfiles at once
|
|
|
|
6.11. What does "Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc" mean?
|
|
|
|
6.12. What does "Could not find bsd.own.mk" mean?
|
|
|
|
6.13. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
6.14. How do I change the location of configuration files?
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
6.15. Automated security checks
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This section contains hints, tips & tricks on special things in pkgsrc that we
|
|
|
|
didn't find a better place for in the previous chapters, and it contains items
|
|
|
|
for both pkgsrc users and developers.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-03-08 02:25:09 +01:00
|
|
|
6.1. Are there any mailing lists for pkg-related discussion?
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-03-08 02:25:09 +01:00
|
|
|
The following mailing lists may be of interest to pkgsrc users:
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgsrc-bugs: A list where problem reports related to pkgsrc are sent and
|
|
|
|
discussed.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgsrc-bulk: A list where the results of pkgsrc bulk builds are sent and
|
|
|
|
discussed.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgsrc-changes: A list where all commit messages to pkgsrc are sent.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* tech-pkg: A general discussion list for all things related to pkgsrc.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-03-08 02:25:09 +01:00
|
|
|
To subscribe, do:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
% echo subscribe listname | mail majordomo@NetBSD.org
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Archives for all these mailing lists are available from http://
|
|
|
|
mail-index.NetBSD.org/.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6.2. Where's the pkgviews documentation?
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Pkgviews is tightly integrated with buildlink. You can find a pkgviews User's
|
|
|
|
guide in pkgsrc/mk/buildlink3/PKGVIEWS_UG.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6.3. Utilities for package management (pkgtools)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc/pkgtools directory pkgtools contains a number of useful utilities
|
|
|
|
for both users and developers of pkgsrc. This section attempts only to make the
|
|
|
|
reader aware of the utilities and when they might be useful, and not to
|
|
|
|
duplicate the documentation that comes with each package.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Utilities used by pkgsrc (automatically installed when needed):
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/x11-links: Symlinks for use by buildlink.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
OS tool augmentation (automatically installed when needed):
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/digest: Calculates various kinds of checksums (including SHA1).
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/libnbcompat: Compatibility library for pkgsrc tools.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/mtree: Installed on non-BSD systems due to lack of native mtree.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkg_install: Up-to-date replacement for /usr/sbin/pkg_install, or
|
|
|
|
for use on operating systems where pkg_install is not present.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Utilities used by pkgsrc (not automatically installed):
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkg_tarup: Create a binary package from an already-installed
|
|
|
|
package. Used by make replace to save the old package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/dfdisk: Adds extra functionality to pkgsrc, allowing it to fetch
|
2004-11-20 14:26:39 +01:00
|
|
|
distfiles from multiple locations. It currently supports the following
|
|
|
|
methods: multiple CD-ROMs and network FTP/HTTP connections.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/xpkgwedge: Put X11 packages someplace else (enabled by default).
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* devel/cpuflags: Determine the best compiler flags to optimise code for your
|
|
|
|
current CPU and compiler.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Utilities for keeping track of installed packages, being up to date, etc:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkg_chk: Reports on packages whose installed versions do not match
|
|
|
|
the latest pkgsrc entries.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkgdep: Makes dependency graphs of packages, to aid in choosing a
|
|
|
|
strategy for updating.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkgdepgraph: Makes graphs from the output of pkgtools/pkgdep (uses
|
|
|
|
graphviz).
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkglint: The pkglint(1) program checks a pkgsrc entry for errors,
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
lintpkgsrc(1) does various checks on the complete pkgsrc system.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkgsurvey: Report what packages you have installed.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Utilities for people maintaining or creating individual packages:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkgdiff: Automate making and maintaining patches for a package
|
|
|
|
(includes pkgdiff, pkgvi, mkpatches, etc.).
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/rpm2pkg, pkgtools/url2pkg: Aids in converting to pkgsrc.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/gensolpkg: Convert pkgsrc to a Solaris package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Utilities for people maintaining pkgsrc (or more obscure pkg utilities)
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkgconflict: Find packages that conflict but aren't marked as
|
|
|
|
such.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/pkg_comp: Build packages in a chrooted area.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgtools/libkver: Spoof kernel version for chrooted cross builds.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
6.4. How to use pkgsrc as non-root
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you want to use pkgsrc as non-root user, you can set some variables to make
|
2005-05-29 19:20:54 +02:00
|
|
|
pkgsrc work under these conditions. At the very least, you need to set
|
|
|
|
UNPRIVILEGED to "yes"; this will turn on unprivileged mode and set multiple
|
|
|
|
related variables to allow installation of packages as non-root.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In case the defaults are not enough, you may want to tune some other variables
|
|
|
|
used. For example, if the automatic user/group detection leads to incorrect
|
|
|
|
values (or not the ones you would like to use), you can change them by setting
|
|
|
|
UNPRIVILEGED_USER and UNPRIVILEGED_GROUP respectively.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As regards bootstrapping, please note that the bootstrap script will ease
|
|
|
|
non-root configuration when given the "--ignore-user-check" flag, as it will
|
|
|
|
choose and use multiple default directories under ~/pkg as the installation
|
|
|
|
targets. These directories can be overriden by the "--prefix" flag provided by
|
|
|
|
the script, as well as some others that allow finer tuning of the tree layout.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-01-11 17:34:44 +01:00
|
|
|
6.5. How to resume transfers when fetching distfiles?
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-01-11 17:34:44 +01:00
|
|
|
By default resuming transfers in pkgsrc is disabled, but you can enable this
|
|
|
|
feature by adding the option PKG_RESUME_TRANSFERS=YES into /etc/mk.conf. If,
|
|
|
|
during a fetch step, an incomplete distfile is found, pkgsrc will try to resume
|
|
|
|
it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can also use a different program than the default ftp(1) by changing the
|
|
|
|
FETCH_CMD variable. Don't forget to set FETCH_RESUME_ARGS and FETCH_OUTPUT_ARGS
|
|
|
|
if you are not using default values.
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For example, if you want to use wget to resume downloads, you'll have to use
|
|
|
|
something like:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
FETCH_CMD=wget
|
|
|
|
FETCH_BEFORE_ARGS=--passive-ftp
|
|
|
|
FETCH_RESUME_ARGS=-c
|
|
|
|
FETCH_OUTPUT_ARGS=-O
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6.6. How can I install/use XFree86 from pkgsrc?
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you want to use XFree86 from pkgsrc instead of your system's own X11 (/usr/
|
2005-01-11 17:34:44 +01:00
|
|
|
X11R6, /usr/openwin, ...), you will have to add the following line into /etc/
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
X11_TYPE=XFree86
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6.7. How can I install/use X.org from pkgsrc?
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you want to use X.org from pkgsrc instead of your system's own X11 (/usr/
|
2005-01-11 17:34:44 +01:00
|
|
|
X11R6, /usr/openwin, ...) you will have to add the following line into /etc/
|
|
|
|
mk.conf:
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
X11_TYPE=xorg
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
6.8. How to fetch files from behind a firewall
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you are sitting behind a firewall which does not allow direct connections to
|
|
|
|
Internet hosts (i.e. non-NAT), you may specify the relevant proxy hosts. This
|
|
|
|
is done using an environment variable in the form of a URL e.g. in Amdahl, the
|
|
|
|
machine "orpheus.amdahl.com" is one of the firewalls, and it uses port 80 as
|
|
|
|
the proxy port number. So the proxy environment variables are:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
ftp_proxy=ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
http_proxy=http://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/
|
|
|
|
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
6.9. How do I tell make fetch to do passive FTP?
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This depends on which utility is used to retrieve distfiles. From bsd.pkg.mk,
|
|
|
|
FETCH_CMD is assigned the first available command from the following list:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* ${LOCALBASE}/bin/ftp
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* /usr/bin/ftp
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
On a default NetBSD installation, this will be /usr/bin/ftp, which
|
|
|
|
automatically tries passive connections first, and falls back to active
|
|
|
|
connections if the server refuses to do passive. For the other tools, add the
|
|
|
|
following to your /etc/mk.conf file: PASSIVE_FETCH=1.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Having that option present will prevent /usr/bin/ftp from falling back to
|
|
|
|
active transfers.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
6.10. How to fetch all distfiles at once
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You would like to download all the distfiles in a single batch from work or
|
|
|
|
university, where you can't run a make fetch. There is an archive of distfiles
|
|
|
|
on ftp.NetBSD.org, but downloading the entire directory may not be appropriate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The answer here is to do a make fetch-list in /usr/pkgsrc or one of it's
|
|
|
|
subdirectories, carry the resulting list to your machine at work/school and use
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
it there. If you don't have a NetBSD-compatible ftp(1) (like lukemftp) at work,
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
don't forget to set FETCH_CMD to something that fetches a URL:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
At home:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
% cd /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
% make fetch-list FETCH_CMD=wget DISTDIR=/tmp/distfiles >/tmp/fetch.sh
|
|
|
|
% scp /tmp/fetch.sh work:/tmp
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
At work:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
% sh /tmp/fetch.sh
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
then tar up /tmp/distfiles and take it home.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have a machine running NetBSD, and you want to get all distfiles (even
|
|
|
|
ones that aren't for your machine architecture), you can do so by using the
|
|
|
|
above-mentioned make fetch-list approach, or fetch the distfiles directly by
|
|
|
|
running:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
% make mirror-distfiles
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you even decide to ignore NO_{SRC,BIN}_ON_{FTP,CDROM}, then you can get
|
|
|
|
everything by running:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
% make fetch NO_SKIP=yes
|
|
|
|
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
6.11. What does "Don't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc" mean?
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When compiling the pkgtools/pkg_install package, you get the error from make
|
|
|
|
that it doesn't know how to make /usr/share/tmac/tmac.andoc? This indicates
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
that you don't have installed the "text" set (nroff, ...) from the NetBSD base
|
|
|
|
distribution on your machine. It is recommended to do that to format manpages.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the case of the pkgtools/pkg_install package, you can get away with setting
|
|
|
|
NOMAN=YES either in the environment or in /etc/mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
6.12. What does "Could not find bsd.own.mk" mean?
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You didn't install the compiler set, comp.tgz, when you installed your NetBSD
|
|
|
|
machine. Please get it and install it, by extracting it in /:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# cd /
|
|
|
|
# tar --unlink -zxvpf .../comp.tgz
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
comp.tgz is part of every NetBSD release. Get the one that corresponds to your
|
|
|
|
release (determine via uname -r).
|
|
|
|
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
6.13. Using 'sudo' with pkgsrc
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When installing packages as non-root user and using the just-in-time su(1)
|
|
|
|
feature of pkgsrc, it can become annoying to type in the root password for each
|
|
|
|
required package installed. To avoid this, the sudo package can be used, which
|
|
|
|
does password caching over a limited time. To use it, install sudo (either as
|
|
|
|
binary package or from security/sudo) and then put the following into your /etc
|
|
|
|
/mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
.if exists(${LOCALBASE}/bin/sudo)
|
|
|
|
SU_CMD=${LOCALBASE}/bin/sudo /bin/sh -c
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
6.14. How do I change the location of configuration files?
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
As the system administrator, you can choose where configuration files are
|
|
|
|
installed. The default settings make all these files go into ${PREFIX}/etc or
|
|
|
|
some of its subdirectories; this may be suboptimal depending on your
|
|
|
|
expectations (e.g., a read-only, NFS-exported PREFIX with a need of per-machine
|
|
|
|
configuration of the provided packages).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In order to change the defaults, you can modify the PKG_SYSCONFBASE variable
|
|
|
|
(in /etc/mk.conf) to point to your preferred configuration directory; some
|
|
|
|
common examples include /etc or /etc/pkg.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Furthermore, you can change this value on a per-package basis by setting the
|
|
|
|
PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR} variable. PKG_SYSCONFVAR's value usually
|
|
|
|
matches the name of the package you would like to modify, that is, the contents
|
|
|
|
of PKGBASE.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
Note that, after changing these settings, you must rebuild and reinstall any
|
|
|
|
affected packages.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
6.15. Automated security checks
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please be aware that there can often be bugs in third-party software, and some
|
|
|
|
of these bugs can leave a machine vulnerable to exploitation by attackers. In
|
|
|
|
an effort to lessen the exposure, the NetBSD packages team maintains a database
|
|
|
|
of known-exploits to packages which have at one time been included in pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
The database can be downloaded automatically, and a security audit of all
|
|
|
|
packages installed on a system can take place. To do this, install the security
|
|
|
|
/audit-packages package. It has two components:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
1. download-vulnerability-list, an easy way to download a list of the security
|
|
|
|
vulnerabilities information. This list is kept up to date by the NetBSD
|
|
|
|
security officer and the NetBSD packages team, and is distributed from the
|
|
|
|
NetBSD ftp server:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/distfiles/pkg-vulnerabilities
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
2. audit-packages, an easy way to audit the current machine, checking each
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
vulnerability which is known. If a vulnerable package is installed, it will
|
|
|
|
be shown by output to stdout, including a description of the type of
|
|
|
|
vulnerability, and a URL containing more information.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
Use of the security/audit-packages package is strongly recommended! After
|
|
|
|
"audit-packages" is installed, please read the package's message, which you can
|
|
|
|
get by running pkg_info -D audit-package.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
The pkgsrc developer's guide
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
7. Package components - files, directories and contents
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
7.1. Makefile
|
|
|
|
7.2. distinfo
|
|
|
|
7.3. patches/*
|
|
|
|
7.4. Other mandatory files
|
|
|
|
7.5. Optional files
|
|
|
|
7.6. work*
|
|
|
|
7.7. files/*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8. Programming in Makefiles
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
8.1. Makefile variables
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
8.1.1. Naming conventions
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
8.2. Code snippets
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
8.2.1. Adding things to a list
|
|
|
|
8.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
|
|
|
|
8.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
|
|
|
|
8.2.4. Quoting guideline
|
|
|
|
8.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
9. PLIST issues
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
9.1. RCS ID
|
|
|
|
9.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
|
|
|
|
9.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
|
|
|
|
9.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
|
|
|
|
9.5. Manpage-compression
|
|
|
|
9.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
|
|
|
|
9.7. Platform specific and differing PLISTs
|
|
|
|
9.8. Sharing directories between packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10. Buildlink methodology
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
|
|
|
|
10.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
|
2005-05-24 14:45:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_DEPENDS. pkg in buildlink3.mk files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.3. Writing builtin.mk files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
|
|
|
|
10.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
11. The pkginstall framework
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.1.1. Directory manipulation
|
|
|
|
11.1.2. File manipulation
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.2. Configuration files
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
|
|
|
|
11.2.2. Telling the software were configuration files are
|
|
|
|
11.2.3. Patching installations
|
|
|
|
11.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
11.3. System startup scripts
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
11.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
11.4. System users and groups
|
|
|
|
11.5. System shells
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
11.5.1. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
12. Options handling
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
12.1. Global default options
|
|
|
|
12.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
13. The build process
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
13.1. Program location
|
|
|
|
13.2. Main targets
|
|
|
|
13.3. Other helpful targets
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
14. Notes on fixes for packages
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
14.1. General operation
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
14.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
|
|
|
|
14.1.2. Where to install documentation
|
|
|
|
14.1.3. Restricted packages
|
|
|
|
14.1.4. Handling dependencies
|
|
|
|
14.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
|
|
|
|
14.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
|
|
|
|
14.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
|
|
|
|
14.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
|
|
|
|
14.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
|
|
|
|
14.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
package
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.11. Portability of packages
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.2. Possible downloading issues
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
|
|
|
|
14.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.3. Configuration gotchas
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
|
|
|
|
14.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
|
|
|
|
14.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.4. Building considerations
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.4.1. CPP defines
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5. Package specific actions
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.1. User interaction
|
|
|
|
14.5.2. Handling licenses
|
|
|
|
14.5.3. Installing score files
|
|
|
|
14.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts
|
|
|
|
14.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
|
|
|
|
14.5.6. Packages installing perl modules
|
|
|
|
14.5.7. Packages installing info files
|
|
|
|
14.5.8. Packages installing GConf2 data files
|
|
|
|
14.5.9. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
|
|
|
|
14.5.10. Packages installing X11 fonts
|
|
|
|
14.5.11. Packages installing GTK2 modules
|
|
|
|
14.5.12. Packages installing SGML or XML data
|
|
|
|
14.5.13. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
|
|
|
|
14.5.14. Packages using intltool
|
|
|
|
14.5.15. Packages installing startup scripts
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.6. Feedback to the author
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
15. Debugging
|
|
|
|
16. Submitting and Committing
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
16.1. Submitting your packages
|
|
|
|
16.2. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
|
|
|
|
16.3. Updating a package to a newer version
|
|
|
|
16.4. Moving a package in pkgsrc
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
Chapter 7. Package components - files, directories and contents
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
7.1. Makefile
|
|
|
|
7.2. distinfo
|
|
|
|
7.3. patches/*
|
|
|
|
7.4. Other mandatory files
|
|
|
|
7.5. Optional files
|
|
|
|
7.6. work*
|
|
|
|
7.7. files/*
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Whenever you're preparing a package, there are a number of files involved which
|
|
|
|
are described in the following sections.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
7.1. Makefile
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Building, installation and creation of a binary package are all controlled by
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
the package's Makefile. The Makefile describes various things about a package,
|
|
|
|
for example from where to get it, how to configure, build, and install it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A package Makefile contains several sections that describe the package.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the first section there are the following variables, which should appear
|
|
|
|
exactly in the order given here.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* DISTNAME is the basename of the distribution file to be downloaded from the
|
|
|
|
package's website.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* PKGNAME is the name of the package, as used by pkgsrc. You only need to
|
|
|
|
provide it if it differs from DISTNAME. Usually it is the directory name
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
together with the version number. It must match the regular expression ^
|
|
|
|
[A-Za-z0-9][A-Za-z0-9-_.+]*$, that is, it starts with a letter or digit,
|
|
|
|
and contains only letters, digits, dashes, underscores, dots and plus
|
|
|
|
signs.
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* CATEGORIES is a list of categories which the package fits in. You can
|
|
|
|
choose any of the top-level directories of pkgsrc for it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* MASTER_SITES is a list of URLs where the distribution files can be
|
|
|
|
downloaded. Each URL must end with a slash.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The second section contains the following variables.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* MAINTAINER is the mail address of the package's maintainer, which is the
|
|
|
|
person you can contact when the package does not work.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* HOMEPAGE is a URL where users can find more information about the package.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* COMMENT is a one-line comment about the purpose of the package.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The MASTER_SITES may be set to one of the predefined sites:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_APACHE}
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_BACKUP}
|
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_CYGWIN}
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_DEBIAN}
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_FREEBSD}
|
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_FREEBSD_LOCAL}
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_GNOME}
|
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_GNU}
|
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_GNUSTEP}
|
2004-12-02 23:23:46 +01:00
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_IFARCHIVE}
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_MOZILLA}
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_OPENOFFICE}
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_PERL_CPAN}
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_R_CRAN}
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE}
|
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_SUNSITE}
|
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_SUSE}
|
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_TEX_CTAN}
|
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_XCONTRIB}
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_XEMACS}
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
If one of these predefined sites is chosen, you may require the ability to
|
|
|
|
specify a subdirectory of that site. Since these macros may expand to more than
|
|
|
|
one actual site, you must use the following construct to specify a
|
|
|
|
subdirectory:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_GNU:=subdirectory/name/}
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
${MASTER_SITE_SOURCEFORGE:=project_name/}
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note the trailing slash after the subdirectory name.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MASTER_SITE_SUBDIR has been deprecated and should no longer be used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the package has multiple DISTFILES or multiple PATCHFILES from different
|
|
|
|
sites, set SITES_foo to a list of URI's where file "foo" may be found. "foo"
|
|
|
|
includes the suffix, e.g.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DISTFILES= ${DISTNAME}${EXTRACT_SUFX}
|
|
|
|
DISTFILES+= foo-file.tar.gz
|
|
|
|
SITES_foo-file.tar.gz=http://www.somewhere.com/somehow/ \
|
|
|
|
http://www.somewhereelse.com/mirror/somehow/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that the normal default setting of DISTFILES must be made explicit if you
|
|
|
|
want to add to it (rather than replace it), as you usually would.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Currently the following values are available for CATEGORIES. If more than one
|
|
|
|
is used, they need to be separated by spaces:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
archivers cross geography meta-pkgs security
|
|
|
|
audio databases graphics misc shells
|
|
|
|
benchmarks devel ham multimedia sysutils
|
|
|
|
biology editors inputmethod net textproc
|
|
|
|
cad emulators lang news time
|
|
|
|
chat finance mail parallel wm
|
|
|
|
comms fonts math pkgtools www
|
|
|
|
converters games mbone print x11
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please pay attention to the following gotchas:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Add MANCOMPRESSED if manpages are installed in compressed form by the
|
|
|
|
package; see comment in bsd.pkg.mk.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Replace /usr/local with "${PREFIX}" in all files (see patches, below).
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
* If the package installs any info files, see Section 14.5.7, "Packages
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
installing info files".
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Set MAINTAINER to be yourself. If you really can't maintain the package for
|
|
|
|
future updates, set it to <tech-pkg@NetBSD.org>.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* If a home page for the software in question exists, add the variable
|
|
|
|
HOMEPAGE right after MAINTAINER. The value of this variable should be the
|
|
|
|
URL for the home page.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Be sure to set the COMMENT variable to a short description of the package,
|
|
|
|
not containing the pkg's name.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
7.2. distinfo
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Most important, the mandatory message digest, or checksum, of all the distfiles
|
|
|
|
needed for the package to compile, confirming they match the original file
|
|
|
|
distributed by the author. This ensures that the distfile retrieved from the
|
|
|
|
Internet has not been corrupted during transfer or altered by a malign force to
|
|
|
|
introduce a security hole. It is generated using the make makesum command. The
|
|
|
|
digest algorithm used was, at one stage, md5, but that was felt lacking
|
|
|
|
compared to sha1, and so sha1 is now the default algorithm. The distfile size
|
|
|
|
is also generated and stored in new distinfo files. The pkgtools/digest utility
|
|
|
|
calculates all of the digests in the distinfo file, and it provides various
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
different algorithms. At the current time, the algorithms provided are: md5,
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
rmd160, sha1, sha256, sha384 and sha512.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some packages have different sets of distfiles on a per architecture basis, for
|
|
|
|
example www/navigator). These are kept in the same distinfo file and care
|
|
|
|
should be taken when upgrading such a package to ensure distfile information is
|
|
|
|
not lost.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The message digest/checksum for all the official patches found in the patches/
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
directory (see Section 7.3, "patches/*") for the package is also stored in the
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
distinfo file. This is a message digest/checksum of all lines in the patch file
|
|
|
|
except the NetBSD RCS Id. This file is generated by invoking make makepatchsum
|
|
|
|
(or make mps if you're in a hurry).
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
7.3. patches/*
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This directory contains files that are used by the patch(1) command to modify
|
|
|
|
the sources as distributed in the distribution file into a form that will
|
|
|
|
compile and run perfectly on NetBSD. The files are applied successively in
|
|
|
|
alphabetic order (as returned by a shell "patches/patch-*" glob expansion), so
|
|
|
|
patch-aa is applied before patch-ab, etc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The patch-* files should be in diff -bu format, and apply without a fuzz to
|
|
|
|
avoid problems. (To force patches to apply with fuzz you can set
|
|
|
|
PATCH_FUZZ_FACTOR=-F2). Furthermore, do not put changes for more than one file
|
|
|
|
into a single patch-file, as this will make future modifications more
|
|
|
|
difficult.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Similar, a file should be patched at most once, not several times by several
|
|
|
|
different patches. If a file needs several patches, they should be combined
|
|
|
|
into one file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
One important thing to mention is to pay attention that no RCS IDs get stored
|
|
|
|
in the patch files, as these will cause problems when later checked into the
|
|
|
|
NetBSD CVS tree. Use the pkgdiff from the pkgtools/pkgdiff package to avoid
|
|
|
|
these problems.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For even more automation, we recommend using mkpatches from the same package to
|
|
|
|
make a whole set of patches. You just have to backup files before you edit them
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
to filename.orig, e.g. with cp -p filename filename.orig or, easier, by using
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
pkgvi again from the same package. If you upgrade a package this way, you can
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
easily compare the new set of patches with the previously existing one with
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
patchdiff.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you have finished a package, remember to generate the checksums for the
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
patch files by using the make makepatchsum command, see Section 7.2, "distinfo"
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Patch files that are distributed by the author or other maintainers can be
|
|
|
|
listed in $PATCHFILES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If it is desired to store any patches that should not be committed into pkgsrc,
|
|
|
|
they can be kept outside the pkgsrc tree in the $LOCALPATCHES directory. The
|
|
|
|
directory tree there is expected to have the same "category/package" structure
|
|
|
|
as pkgsrc, and patches are expected to be stored inside these dirs (also known
|
|
|
|
as $LOCALPATCHES/$PKGPATH). For example if you want to keep a private patch for
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc/graphics/png, keep it in $LOCALPATCHES/graphics/png/mypatch. All files
|
|
|
|
in the named directory are expected to be patch files, and they are applied
|
|
|
|
after pkgsrc patches are applied.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
7.4. Other mandatory files
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DESCR
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
A multi-line description of the piece of software. This should include any
|
|
|
|
credits where they are due. Please bear in mind that others do not share
|
|
|
|
your sense of humour (or spelling idiosyncrasies), and that others will
|
|
|
|
read everything that you write here.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
PLIST
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This file governs the files that are installed on your system: all the
|
|
|
|
binaries, manual pages, etc. There are other directives which may be
|
|
|
|
entered in this file, to control the creation and deletion of directories,
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
and the location of inserted files. See Chapter 9, PLIST issues for more
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
information.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
7.5. Optional files
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
INSTALL
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This shell script is invoked twice by pkg_add(1). First time after package
|
|
|
|
extraction and before files are moved in place, the second time after the
|
|
|
|
files to install are moved in place. This can be used to do any custom
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
procedures not possible with @exec commands in PLIST. See pkg_add(1) and
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
pkg_create(1) for more information.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
DEINSTALL
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This script is executed before and after any files are removed. It is this
|
|
|
|
script's responsibility to clean up any additional messy details around the
|
|
|
|
package's installation, since all pkg_delete knows is how to delete the
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
files created in the original distribution. See pkg_delete(1) and
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
pkg_create(1) for more information.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
MESSAGE
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Display this file after installation of the package. Useful for things like
|
|
|
|
legal notices on almost-free software and hints for updating config files
|
|
|
|
after installing modules for apache, PHP etc. Please note that you can
|
|
|
|
modify variables in it easily by using MESSAGE_SUBST in the package's
|
|
|
|
Makefile:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
MESSAGE_SUBST+= SOMEVAR="somevalue"
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
replaces "${SOMEVAR}" with "somevalue" in MESSAGE.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
7.6. work*
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you type make the distribution files are unpacked into this directory. It
|
|
|
|
can be removed by running make clean. Besides the sources, this directory is
|
|
|
|
also used to keep various timestamp files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a package doesn't create a subdirectory for itself (like GNU software does,
|
|
|
|
for instance), but extracts itself in the current directory, you should set
|
|
|
|
WRKSRC accordingly, e.g. editors/sam again, but the quick answer is:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
WRKSRC= ${WRKDIR}
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that the old NO_WRKSUBDIR has been deprecated and should not be
|
|
|
|
used. Also, if your package doesn't create a subdir with the name of DISTNAME
|
|
|
|
but some different name, set WRKSRC to point to the proper name in ${WRKDIR}.
|
|
|
|
See lang/tcl and x11/tk for examples, and here is another one:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
WRKSRC= ${WRKDIR}/${DISTNAME}/unix
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The name of the working directory created by pkgsrc is work by default. If the
|
|
|
|
same pkgsrc tree should be used on several different platforms, the variable
|
|
|
|
OBJMACHINE can be set in /etc/mk.conf to attach the platform to the directory
|
|
|
|
name, e.g. work.i386 or work.sparc.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
7.7. files/*
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have any files that you wish to be placed in the package prior to
|
|
|
|
configuration or building, you could place these files here and use a "${CP}"
|
|
|
|
command in the "pre-configure" target to achieve this. Alternatively, you could
|
|
|
|
simply diff the file against /dev/null and use the patch mechanism to manage
|
|
|
|
the creation of this file.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
Chapter 8. Programming in Makefiles
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.1. Makefile variables
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.1.1. Naming conventions
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.2. Code snippets
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.2.1. Adding things to a list
|
|
|
|
8.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
|
|
|
|
8.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
|
|
|
|
8.2.4. Quoting guideline
|
|
|
|
8.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Pkgsrc consists of many Makefile fragments, each of which forms a well-defined
|
|
|
|
part of the pkgsrc system. Using the make(1) system as a programming language
|
|
|
|
for a big system like pkgsrc requires some discipline to keep the code correct
|
|
|
|
and understandable.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The basic ingredients for Makefile programming are variables (which are
|
|
|
|
actually macros) and shell commands. Among these shell commands may even be
|
|
|
|
more complex ones like awk(1) programs. To make sure that every shell command
|
|
|
|
runs as intended it is necessary to quote all variables correctly when they are
|
|
|
|
used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This chapter describes some patterns, that appear quite often in Makefiles,
|
|
|
|
including the pitfalls that come along with them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.1. Makefile variables
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Makefile variables contain strings that can be processed using the five
|
|
|
|
operators ``='', ``+='', ``?='', ``:='', and ``!='', which are described in the
|
|
|
|
make(1) man page.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When a variable's value is parsed from a Makefile, the hash character ``#'' and
|
|
|
|
the backslash character ``\'' are handled specially. If a backslash is followed
|
|
|
|
by a newline, any whitespace immediately in front of the backslash, the
|
|
|
|
backslash, the newline, and any whitespace immediately behind the newline are
|
|
|
|
replaced with a single space. A backspace character and an immediately
|
|
|
|
following hash character are replaced with a single hash character. Otherwise
|
|
|
|
the backslash is passed as is. In a variable assignment, any hash character
|
|
|
|
that is not preceded by a backslash starts a comment that continues upto the
|
|
|
|
end of the logical line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: Because of this parsing algorithm the only way to create a variable
|
|
|
|
consisting of a single backslash is using the ``!='' operator, for example:
|
|
|
|
BACKSLASH!=echo "\\".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
So far for defining variables. The other thing you can do with variables is
|
|
|
|
evaluating them. A variable is evaluated when it is part of the right side of
|
|
|
|
the ``:='' or the ``!='' operator, or directly before executing a shell command
|
|
|
|
which the variable is part of. In all other cases make(1) performs lazy
|
|
|
|
evaluation, that is, variables are not evaluated until there's no other way.
|
|
|
|
The ``modifiers'' mentioned in the man page also evaluate the variable.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some of the modifiers split the string into words and then operate on the
|
|
|
|
words, others operate on the string as a whole. When a string is splitted into
|
|
|
|
words, it is splitted as you would expect it from sh(1).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
No rule without exception?the .for loop does not follow the shell quoting rules
|
|
|
|
but splits at sequences of whitespace.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are several types of variables that should be handled differently.
|
|
|
|
Strings and two types of lists.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Strings can contain arbitrary characters. Nevertheless you should restrict
|
|
|
|
yourself to only using printable characters. Examples are PREFIX and
|
|
|
|
COMMENT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Internal lists are lists that are never exported to any shell command.
|
|
|
|
Their elements are separated by whitespace. Therefore the elements
|
|
|
|
themselves cannot have embedded whitespace. Any other characters are
|
|
|
|
allowed. Internal lists can be used in .for loops. Examples are DEPENDS and
|
|
|
|
BUILD_DEPENDS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* External lists are lists that may be exported to a shell command. Their
|
|
|
|
elements can contain any characters, including whitespace. That's why they
|
|
|
|
cannot be used in .for loops. Examples are DISTFILES and MASTER_SITES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.1.1. Naming conventions
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* All variable names starting with an underscore are reserved for use by the
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc infrastructure. They shall not be used by package Makefiles.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* In .for loops you should use lowercase variable names for the iteration
|
|
|
|
variables.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* All list variables should have a ``plural'' name, e.g. PKG_OPTIONS or
|
|
|
|
DISTFILES.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.2. Code snippets
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This section presents you with some code snippets you should use in your own
|
|
|
|
code. If you don't find anything appropriate here, you should test your code
|
|
|
|
and add it here.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.2.1. Adding things to a list
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
STRING= foo * bar `date`
|
|
|
|
INT_LIST= # empty
|
|
|
|
ANOTHER_INT_LIST= apache-[0-9]*:../../www/apache
|
|
|
|
EXT_LIST= # empty
|
|
|
|
ANOTHER_EXT_LIST= a=b c=d
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
INT_LIST+= ${STRING} # 1
|
|
|
|
INT_LIST+= ${ANOTHER_INT_LIST} # 2
|
|
|
|
EXT_LIST+= ${STRING:Q} # 3
|
|
|
|
EXT_LIST+= ${ANOTHER_EXT_LIST} # 4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you add a string to an external list (example 3), it must be quoted. In
|
|
|
|
all other cases, you must not add a quoting level. You must not merge internal
|
|
|
|
and external lists, unless you are sure that all entries are correctly
|
|
|
|
interpreted in both lists.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
EXT_LIST= # empty
|
|
|
|
.for i in ${INT_LIST}
|
|
|
|
EXT_LIST+= ${i:Q}""
|
|
|
|
.endfor
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This code converts the internal list INT_LIST into the external list EXT_LIST.
|
|
|
|
As the elements of an internal list are unquoted they must be quoted here. The
|
|
|
|
reason for appending "" is explained below.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
STRING= foo bar < > * `date` $$HOME ' "
|
|
|
|
EXT_LIST= string=${STRING:Q} x=second\ item
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
all:
|
|
|
|
echo ${STRING} # 1
|
|
|
|
echo "${STRING}" # 2
|
|
|
|
echo "${STRING:Q}" # 3
|
|
|
|
echo ${STRING:Q} # 4
|
|
|
|
echo x${STRING:Q} | sed 1s,.,, # 5
|
|
|
|
env ${EXT_LIST} /bin/sh -c 'echo "$$string"; echo "$$x"'
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example 1 leads to a syntax error in the shell, as the characters are just
|
|
|
|
copied.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example 2 leads to a syntax error too, and if you leave out the last "
|
|
|
|
character from ${STRING}, date(1) will be executed. The $HOME shell variable
|
|
|
|
would be evaluated, too.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example 3 outputs each space character preceded by a backslash (or not),
|
|
|
|
depending on the implementation of the echo(1) command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example 4 handles correctly every string that does not start with a dash. In
|
|
|
|
that case, the result depends on the implementation of the echo(1) command. As
|
|
|
|
long as you can guarantee that your input does not start with a dash this form
|
|
|
|
is appropriate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example 5 handles even the case of a leading dash correctly.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The EXT_LIST does not need to be quoted because the quoting has already be done
|
|
|
|
when adding elements to the list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As internal lists shall not be passed to the shell, there is no example for it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.2.4. Quoting guideline
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are many possible sources of wrongly quoted variables. This section lists
|
|
|
|
some of the commonly known ones.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Whenever you use the value of a list, think about what happens to leading
|
|
|
|
or trailing whitespace. If the list is a well-formed shell expression you
|
|
|
|
can apply the :M* modifier to strip leading and trailing whitespace from
|
|
|
|
each word. The :M operator first splits its argument according to the rules
|
|
|
|
of the shell, and then creates a new list consisting of all words that
|
|
|
|
match the shell glob expression *, that is: all. One class of situations
|
|
|
|
where this is needed is when adding a variable like CPPFLAGS to
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS. If the configure script invokes other configure scripts it
|
|
|
|
strips the leading and trailing whitespace from the variable and then
|
|
|
|
passes it to the other configure scripts. But these configure scripts
|
|
|
|
expect the (child) CPPFLAGS variable to be the same as the parent CPPFLAGS.
|
|
|
|
That's why we better pass the CPPFLAGS value properly trimmed. And here is
|
|
|
|
how we do it:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CPPFLAGS= # empty
|
|
|
|
CPPFLAGS+= -Wundef -DPREFIX=\"${PREFIX:Q}\"
|
|
|
|
CPPFLAGS+= ${MY_CPPFLAGS}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= CPPFLAGS=${CPPFLAGS:M*:Q}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
all:
|
|
|
|
echo x${CPPFLAGS:Q}x # leading and trailing whitespace
|
|
|
|
echo x${CONFIGURE_ARGS}x # properly trimmed
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* The example above contains one bug: The ${PREFIX} is a properly quoted
|
|
|
|
shell expression, but there is the C compiler after it, which also expects
|
|
|
|
a properly quoted string (this time in C syntax). The version above is
|
|
|
|
therefore only correct if ${PREFIX} does not have embedded backslashes or
|
|
|
|
double quotes. If you want to allow these, you have to add another layer of
|
|
|
|
quoting to each variable that is used as a C string literal. You cannot use
|
|
|
|
the :Q operator for it, as this operator only works for the shell.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Whenever a variable can be empty the :Q operator can have surprising
|
|
|
|
results. Here are two completely different cases which can be solved with
|
|
|
|
the same trick.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
EMPTY= # empty
|
|
|
|
empty_test:
|
|
|
|
for i in a ${EMPTY:Q} c; do \
|
|
|
|
echo "$$i"; \
|
|
|
|
done
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
for_test:
|
|
|
|
.for i in a:\ a:\test.txt
|
|
|
|
echo ${i:Q}
|
|
|
|
echo "foo"
|
|
|
|
.endfor
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The first example will only print two of the three lines we might have
|
|
|
|
expected. This is because ${EMPTY:Q} expands to the empty string, which the
|
|
|
|
shell cannot see. The workaround is to write ${EMPTY:Q}"". This pattern can
|
|
|
|
be often found as ${TEST} -z ${VAR:Q} or as ${TEST} -f ${FNAME:Q} (both of
|
|
|
|
these are wrong).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The second example will only print three lines instead of four. The first
|
|
|
|
line looks like a:\ echo foo. This is because the backslash of the value a:
|
|
|
|
\ is interpreted as a line-continuation by make(1), which makes the second
|
|
|
|
line the arguments of the echo(1) command from the first line. To avoid
|
|
|
|
this, write ${i:Q}"".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
8.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc bmake program does not handle the following assignment correctly. In
|
|
|
|
case _othervar_ contains a ``-'' character, one of the closing braces is
|
|
|
|
included in ${VAR} after this code executes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
VAR:= ${VAR:N${_othervar_:C/-//}}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For a more complex code snippet and a workaround, see the package regress/
|
|
|
|
make-quoting, testcase bug1.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
Chapter 9. PLIST issues
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
9.1. RCS ID
|
|
|
|
9.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
|
|
|
|
9.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
|
|
|
|
9.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
|
|
|
|
9.5. Manpage-compression
|
|
|
|
9.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
|
|
|
|
9.7. Platform specific and differing PLISTs
|
|
|
|
9.8. Sharing directories between packages
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The PLIST file contains a package's "packing list", i.e. a list of files that
|
|
|
|
belong to the package (relative to the ${PREFIX} directory it's been installed
|
|
|
|
in) plus some additional statements - see the pkg_create(1) manpage for a full
|
|
|
|
list. This chapter addresses some issues that need attention when dealing with
|
|
|
|
the PLIST file (or files, see below!).
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
9.1. RCS ID
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Be sure to add a RCS ID line as the first thing in any PLIST file you write:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-02-10 12:30:00 +01:00
|
|
|
@comment $NetBSD$
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
9.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can use the make print-PLIST command to output a PLIST that matches any new
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
files since the package was extracted. See Section 13.3, "Other helpful
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
targets" for more information on this target.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
9.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
If you have used any of the *-dirs packages, as explained in Section 9.8,
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
"Sharing directories between packages", you may have noticed that make
|
|
|
|
print-PLIST outputs a set of @comments instead of real @dirrm lines. You can
|
|
|
|
also do this for specific directories and files, so that the results of that
|
|
|
|
command are very close to reality. This helps a lot during the update of
|
|
|
|
packages.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The PRINT_PLIST_AWK variable takes a set of AWK patterns and actions that are
|
|
|
|
used to filter the output of print-PLIST. You can append any chunk of AWK
|
|
|
|
scripting you like to it, but be careful with quoting.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For example, to get all files inside the libdata/foo directory removed from the
|
|
|
|
resulting PLIST:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PRINT_PLIST_AWK+= /^libdata\/foo/ { next; }
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
And to get all the @dirrm lines referring to a specific (shared) directory
|
|
|
|
converted to @comments:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PRINT_PLIST_AWK+= /^@dirrm share\/specific/ { print "@comment " $$0; next; }
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
9.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A number of variables are substituted automatically in PLISTs when a package is
|
|
|
|
installed on a system. This includes the following variables:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
${MACHINE_ARCH}, ${MACHINE_GNU_ARCH}
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Some packages like emacs and perl embed information about which
|
|
|
|
architecture they were built on into the pathnames where they install their
|
|
|
|
file. To handle this case, PLIST will be preprocessed before actually used,
|
|
|
|
and the symbol "${MACHINE_ARCH}" will be replaced by what uname -p gives.
|
|
|
|
The same is done if the string ${MACHINE_GNU_ARCH} is embedded in PLIST
|
|
|
|
somewhere - use this on packages that have GNU autoconf created configure
|
|
|
|
scripts.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Legacy note
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
There used to be a symbol "$ARCH" that was replaced by the output of uname
|
|
|
|
-m, but that's no longer supported and has been removed.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
${OPSYS}, ${LOWER_OPSYS}, ${OS_VERSION}
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Some packages want to embed the OS name and version into some paths. To do
|
|
|
|
this, use these variables in the PLIST:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* ${OPSYS} - output of "uname -s"
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* ${LOWER_OPSYS} - lowercase common name (eg. "solaris")
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* ${OS_VERSION} - "uname -r"
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
${PKGLOCALEDIR}
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Packages that install locale files should list them in the PLIST as "$
|
|
|
|
{PKGLOCALEDIR}/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/..." instead of "share/locale/de/
|
|
|
|
LC_MESSAGES/...". This properly handles the fact that different operating
|
|
|
|
systems expect locale files to be either in share or lib by default.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
For a complete list of values which are replaced by default, please look in
|
|
|
|
bsd.pkg.mk (and search for PLIST_SUBST).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you want to change other variables not listed above, you can add variables
|
|
|
|
and their expansions to this variable in the following way, similar to
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
MESSAGE_SUBST (see Section 7.5, "Optional files"):
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PLIST_SUBST+= SOMEVAR="somevalue"
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This replaces all occurrences of "${SOMEVAR}" in the PLIST with "somevalue".
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
9.5. Manpage-compression
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Manpages should be installed in compressed form if MANZ is set (in bsd.own.mk),
|
|
|
|
and uncompressed otherwise. To handle this in the PLIST file, the suffix ".gz"
|
|
|
|
is appended/removed automatically for manpages according to MANZ and
|
|
|
|
MANCOMPRESSED being set or not, see above for details. This modification of the
|
|
|
|
PLIST file is done on a copy of it, not PLIST itself.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
9.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To use one or more files as source for the PLIST used in generating the binary
|
|
|
|
package, set the variable PLIST_SRC to the names of that file(s). The files are
|
|
|
|
later concatenated using cat(1), and order of things is important.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
9.7. Platform specific and differing PLISTs
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some packages decide to install a different set of files based on the operating
|
|
|
|
system being used. These differences can be automatically handled by using the
|
|
|
|
following files:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* PLIST.common
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* PLIST.${OPSYS}
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-03-24 06:07:46 +01:00
|
|
|
* PLIST.${MACHINE_ARCH}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* PLIST.${OPSYS}-${MACHINE_ARCH}
|
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* PLIST.common_end
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
9.8. Sharing directories between packages
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A "shared directory" is a directory where multiple (and unrelated) packages
|
|
|
|
install files. These directories are problematic because you have to add
|
|
|
|
special tricks in the PLIST to conditionally remove them, or have some
|
|
|
|
centralized package handle them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Within pkgsrc, you'll find both approaches. If a directory is shared by a few
|
|
|
|
unrelated packages, it's often not worth to add an extra package to remove it.
|
|
|
|
Therefore, one simply does:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
@unexec ${RMDIR} %D/path/to/shared/directory 2>/dev/null || ${TRUE}
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
in the PLISTs of all affected packages, instead of the regular "@dirrm" line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
However, if the directory is shared across many packages, two different
|
|
|
|
solutions are available:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. If the packages have a common dependency, the directory can be removed in
|
|
|
|
that. For example, see textproc/scrollkeeper, which removes the shared
|
|
|
|
directory share/omf.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. If the packages using the directory are not related at all (they have no
|
|
|
|
common dependencies), a *-dirs package is used.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
From now on, we'll discuss the second solution. To get an idea of the *-dirs
|
|
|
|
packages available, issue:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
% cd .../pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
% ls -d */*-dirs
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Their use from other packages is very simple. The USE_DIRS variable takes a
|
|
|
|
list of package names (without the "-dirs" part) together with the required
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
version number (always pick the latest one when writing new packages).
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For example, if a package installs files under share/applications, it should
|
|
|
|
have the following line in it:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
USE_DIRS+= xdg-1.1
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
After regenerating the PLIST using make print-PLIST, you should get the right
|
|
|
|
(commented out) lines.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that, even if your package is using $X11BASE, it must not depend on the
|
|
|
|
*-x11-dirs packages. Just specify the name without that part and pkgsrc (in
|
|
|
|
particular, mk/dirs.mk) will take care of it.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
Chapter 10. Buildlink methodology
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
|
|
|
|
10.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
|
|
|
|
10.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.3. Writing builtin.mk files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
|
|
|
|
10.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Buildlink is a framework in pkgsrc that controls what headers and libraries are
|
|
|
|
seen by a package's configure and build processes. This is implemented in a two
|
|
|
|
step process:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Symlink headers and libraries for dependencies into BUILDLINK_DIR, which by
|
|
|
|
default is a subdirectory of WRKDIR.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. Create wrapper scripts that are used in place of the normal compiler tools
|
|
|
|
that translate -I${LOCALBASE}/include and -L${LOCALBASE}/lib into
|
|
|
|
references to BUILDLINK_DIR. The wrapper scripts also make native compiler
|
|
|
|
on some operating systems look like GCC, so that packages that expect GCC
|
|
|
|
won't require modifications to build with those native compilers.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This normalizes the environment in which a package is built so that the package
|
|
|
|
may be built consistently despite what other software may be installed. Please
|
|
|
|
note that the normal system header and library paths, e.g. /usr/include, /usr/
|
|
|
|
lib, etc., are always searched -- buildlink3 is designed to insulate the
|
|
|
|
package build from non-system-supplied software.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The process of converting packages to use the buildlink3 framework
|
|
|
|
("bl3ifying") is fairly straightforward. The things to keep in mind are:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
1. Ensure that the build always calls the wrapper scripts instead of the
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
actual toolchain. Some packages are tricky, and the only way to know for
|
|
|
|
sure is the check ${WRKDIR}/.work.log to see if the wrappers are being
|
|
|
|
invoked.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
2. Don't override PREFIX from within the package Makefile, e.g. Java VMs,
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
standalone shells, etc., because the code to symlink files into $
|
|
|
|
{BUILDLINK_DIR} looks for files relative to "pkg_info -qp pkgname".
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
3. Remember that only the buildlink3.mk files that you list in a package's
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Makefile are added as dependencies for that package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
If a dependency on a particular package is required for its libraries and
|
|
|
|
headers, then we replace:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= foo>=1.1.0:../../category/foo
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
with
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.include "../../category/foo/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are several buildlink3.mk files in pkgsrc/mk that handle special package
|
|
|
|
issues:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* bdb.buildlink3.mk chooses either the native or a pkgsrc Berkeley DB
|
|
|
|
implementation based on the values of BDB_ACCEPTED and BDB_DEFAULT.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* curses.buildlink3.mk If the system comes with neither Curses nor NCurses,
|
|
|
|
this will take care to install the devel/ncurses package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* krb5.buildlink3.mk uses the value of KRB5_ACCEPTED to choose between adding
|
|
|
|
a dependency on Heimdal or MIT-krb5 for packages that require a Kerberos 5
|
|
|
|
implementation.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* motif.buildlink3.mk checks for a system-provided Motif installation or adds
|
|
|
|
a dependency on x11/lesstif or x11/openmotif;
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* ossaudio.buildlink3.mk defines several variables that may be used by
|
|
|
|
packages that use the Open Sound System (OSS) API;
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* pgsql.buildlink3.mk will accept either Postgres 7.3 or 7.4, whichever is
|
|
|
|
found installed. See the file for more information.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* pthread.buildlink3.mk uses the value of PTHREAD_OPTS and checks for native
|
|
|
|
pthreads or adds a dependency on devel/pth as needed;
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* xaw.buildlink3.mk uses the value of XAW_TYPE to choose a particular Athena
|
|
|
|
widgets library.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The comments in those buildlink3.mk files provide a more complete description
|
|
|
|
of how to use them properly.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A package's buildlink3.mk file is included by Makefiles to indicate the need to
|
|
|
|
compile and link against header files and libraries provided by the package. A
|
|
|
|
buildlink3.mk file should always provide enough information to add the correct
|
|
|
|
type of dependency relationship and include any other buildlink3.mk files that
|
|
|
|
it needs to find headers and libraries that it needs in turn.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
To generate an initial buildlink3.mk file for further editing, Rene Hexel's
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
pkgtools/createbuildlink package is highly recommended. For most packages, the
|
|
|
|
following command will generate a good starting point for buildlink3.mk files:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
% cd pkgsrc/category/pkgdir
|
|
|
|
% createbuildlink -3 >buildlink3.mk
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following real-life example buildlink3.mk is taken from pkgsrc/graphics/
|
|
|
|
tiff:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-02-10 12:30:00 +01:00
|
|
|
# $NetBSD: buildlink3.mk,v 1.7 2004/03/18 09:12:12 jlam Exp $
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_DEPTH:= ${BUILDLINK_DEPTH}+
|
|
|
|
TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK:= ${TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK}+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.if !empty(BUILDLINK_DEPTH:M+)
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_DEPENDS+= tiff
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_PACKAGES:= ${BUILDLINK_PACKAGES:Ntiff}
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_PACKAGES+= tiff
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.if !empty(TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK:M+)
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.tiff+= tiff>=3.6.1
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_PKGSRCDIR.tiff?= ../../graphics/tiff
|
|
|
|
.endif # TIFF_BUILDLINK3_MK
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.include "../../devel/zlib/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
|
|
.include "../../graphics/jpeg/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
|
|
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_DEPTH:= ${BUILDLINK_DEPTH:S/+$//}
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The header and footer manipulate BUILDLINK_DEPTH, which is common across all
|
|
|
|
buildlink3.mk files and is used to track at what depth we are including
|
|
|
|
buildlink3.mk files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The first section controls if the dependency on pkg is added. BUILDLINK_DEPENDS
|
|
|
|
is the global list of packages for which dependencies are added by buildlink3.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The second section advises pkgsrc that the buildlink3.mk file for pkg has been
|
|
|
|
included at some point. BUILDLINK_PACKAGES is the global list of packages for
|
|
|
|
which buildlink3.mk files have been included. It must always be appended to
|
|
|
|
within a buildlink3.mk file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The third section is protected from multiple inclusion and controls how the
|
|
|
|
dependency on pkg is added. Several important variables are set in the section:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg is the actual dependency recorded in the installed
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
package; this should always be set using += to ensure that we're appending
|
|
|
|
to any pre-existing list of values. This variable should be set to the
|
|
|
|
first version of the package that had the last change in the major number
|
|
|
|
of a shared library or that had a major API change.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_PKGSRCDIR.pkg is the location of the pkg pkgsrc directory;
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_DEPMETHOD.pkg (not shown above) controls whether we use
|
|
|
|
BUILD_DEPENDS or DEPENDS to add the dependency on pkg. The build dependency
|
|
|
|
is selected by setting BUILDLINK_DEPMETHOD.pkg to "build". By default, the
|
|
|
|
full dependency is used.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_INCDIRS.pkg and BUILDLINK_LIBDIRS. pkg (not shown above) are
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
lists of subdirectories of ${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg} to add to the header and
|
|
|
|
library search paths. These default to "include" and "lib" respectively.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_CPPFLAGS.pkg (not shown above) is the list of preprocessor flags
|
|
|
|
to add to CPPFLAGS, which are passed on to the configure and build phases.
|
|
|
|
The "-I" option should be avoided and instead be handled using
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_INCDIRS.pkg as above.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The following variables are all optionally defined within this second section
|
|
|
|
(protected against multiple inclusion) and control which package files are
|
|
|
|
symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR} and how their names are transformed during the
|
|
|
|
symlinking:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_FILES.pkg (not shown above) is a shell glob pattern relative to $
|
|
|
|
{BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg} to be symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR}, e.g. include/
|
|
|
|
*.h.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_FILES_CMD.pkg (not shown above) is a shell pipeline that outputs
|
|
|
|
to stdout a list of files relative to ${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg}. The
|
|
|
|
resulting files are to be symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR}. By default, this
|
|
|
|
takes the +CONTENTS of a pkg and filters it through $
|
|
|
|
{BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.pkg}.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.pkg (not shown above) is a filter command that
|
|
|
|
filters +CONTENTS input into a list of files relative to $
|
|
|
|
{BUILDLINK_PREFIX.pkg} on stdout. By default for overwrite packages,
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_CONTENTS_FILTER.pkg outputs the contents of the include and lib
|
|
|
|
directories in the package +CONTENTS, and for pkgviews packages, it outputs
|
|
|
|
any libtool archives in lib directories.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* BUILDLINK_TRANSFORM.pkg (not shown above) is a list of sed arguments used
|
|
|
|
to transform the name of the source filename into a destination filename,
|
|
|
|
e.g. -e "s|/curses.h|/ncurses.h|g".
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The last section includes any buildlink3.mk needed for pkg's library
|
|
|
|
dependencies. Including these buildlink3.mk files means that the headers and
|
|
|
|
libraries for these dependencies are also symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR}
|
|
|
|
whenever the pkg buildlink3.mk file is included.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-24 14:45:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_DEPENDS. pkg in buildlink3.mk files
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are two situations that require increasing the dependency listed in
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg after a package update:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. if the sonames (major number of the library version) of any installed
|
|
|
|
shared libraries change;
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. if the API or interface to the header files change.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
In these cases, BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg should be adjusted to require at least
|
|
|
|
the new package version. In some cases, the packages that depend on this new
|
|
|
|
version may need their PKGREVISIONs increased and, if they have buildlink3.mk
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
files, their BUILDLINK_DEPENDS. pkg adjusted, too. This is needed so that
|
|
|
|
binary packages made using it will require the correct package dependency and
|
|
|
|
not settle for an older one which will not contain the necessary shared
|
|
|
|
libraries.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please take careful consideration before adjusting BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg as we
|
|
|
|
don't want to cause unneeded package deletions and rebuilds. In many cases, new
|
|
|
|
versions of packages work just fine with older dependencies. See Section
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.4, "Handling dependencies" and Chapter 10, Buildlink methodology for more
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
information about dependencies on other packages, including the
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_RECOMMENDED and RECOMMENDED definitions.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.3. Writing builtin.mk files
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some packages in pkgsrc install headers and libraries that coincide with
|
|
|
|
headers and libraries present in the base system. Aside from a buildlink3.mk
|
|
|
|
file, these packages should also include a builtin.mk file that includes the
|
|
|
|
necessary checks to decide whether using the built-in software or the pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
software is appropriate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The only requirements of a builtin.mk file for pkg are:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. It should set USE_BUILTIN.pkg to either "yes" or "no" after it is included.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. It should not override any USE_BUILTIN.pkg which is already set before the
|
|
|
|
builtin.mk file is included.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. It should be written to allow multiple inclusion. This is very important
|
|
|
|
and takes careful attention to Makefile coding.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following is the recommended template for builtin.mk files:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.if !defined(IS_BUILTIN.foo)
|
|
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
# IS_BUILTIN.foo is set to "yes" or "no" depending on whether "foo"
|
|
|
|
# genuinely exists in the system or not.
|
|
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
IS_BUILTIN.foo?= no
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# BUILTIN_PKG.foo should be set here if "foo" is built-in and its package
|
|
|
|
# version can be determined.
|
|
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
. if !empty(IS_BUILTIN.foo:M[yY][eE][sS])
|
|
|
|
BUILTIN_PKG.foo?= foo-1.0
|
|
|
|
. endif
|
|
|
|
.endif # IS_BUILTIN.foo
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.if !defined(USE_BUILTIN.foo)
|
|
|
|
USE_BUILTIN.foo?= ${IS_BUILTIN.foo}
|
|
|
|
. if defined(BUILTIN_PKG.foo)
|
|
|
|
. for _depend_ in ${BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.foo}
|
|
|
|
. if !empty(USE_BUILTIN.foo:M[yY][eE][sS])
|
|
|
|
USE_BUILTIN.foo!= \
|
|
|
|
if ${PKG_ADMIN} pmatch '${_depend_}' ${BUILTIN_PKG.foo}; then \
|
|
|
|
${ECHO} "yes"; \
|
|
|
|
else \
|
|
|
|
${ECHO} "no"; \
|
|
|
|
fi
|
|
|
|
. endif
|
|
|
|
. endfor
|
|
|
|
. endif
|
|
|
|
.endif # USE_BUILTIN.foo
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CHECK_BUILTIN.foo?= no
|
|
|
|
.if !empty(CHECK_BUILTIN.foo:M[nN][oO])
|
|
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
# Here we place code that depends on whether USE_BUILTIN.foo is set to
|
|
|
|
# "yes" or "no".
|
|
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
.endif # CHECK_BUILTIN.foo
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The first section sets IS_BUILTIN.pkg depending on if pkg really exists in the
|
|
|
|
base system. This should not be a base system software with similar
|
|
|
|
functionality to pkg; it should only be "yes" if the actual package is included
|
|
|
|
as part of the base system. This variable is only used internally within the
|
|
|
|
builtin.mk file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The second section sets BUILTIN_PKG.pkg to the version of pkg in the base
|
|
|
|
system if it exists (if IS_BUILTIN.pkg is "yes"). This variable is only used
|
|
|
|
internally within the builtin.mk file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The third section sets USE_BUILTIN.pkg and is required in all builtin.mk files.
|
|
|
|
The code in this section must make the determination whether the built-in
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
software is adequate to satisfy the dependencies listed in BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.
|
|
|
|
pkg. This is typically done by comparing BUILTIN_PKG.pkg against each of the
|
|
|
|
dependencies in BUILDLINK_DEPENDS.pkg. USE_BUILTIN.pkg must be set to the
|
|
|
|
correct value by the end of the builtin.mk file. Note that USE_BUILTIN.pkg may
|
|
|
|
be "yes" even if IS_BUILTIN.pkg is "no" because we may make the determination
|
|
|
|
that the built-in version of the software is similar enough to be used as a
|
|
|
|
replacement.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The last section is guarded by CHECK_BUILTIN.pkg, and includes code that uses
|
|
|
|
the value of USE_BUILTIN.pkg set in the previous section. This typically
|
|
|
|
includes, e.g., adding additional dependency restrictions and listing
|
|
|
|
additional files to symlink into ${BUILDLINK_DIR} (via BUILDLINK_FILES.pkg).
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
10.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When building packages, it's possible to choose whether to set a global
|
|
|
|
preference for using either the built-in (native) version or the pkgsrc version
|
|
|
|
of software to satisfy a dependency. This is controlled by setting
|
|
|
|
PREFER_PKGSRC and PREFER_NATIVE. These variables take values of either "yes",
|
|
|
|
"no", or a list of packages. PREFER_PKGSRC tells pkgsrc to use the pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
versions of software, while PREFER_NATIVE tells pkgsrc to use the built-in
|
|
|
|
versions. Preferences are determined by the most specific instance of the
|
|
|
|
package in either PREFER_PKGSRC or PREFER_NATIVE. If a package is specified in
|
|
|
|
neither or in both variables, then PREFER_PKGSRC has precedence over
|
|
|
|
PREFER_NATIVE. For example, to require using pkgsrc versions of software for
|
|
|
|
all but the most basic bits on a NetBSD system, you can set:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PREFER_PKGSRC= yes
|
|
|
|
PREFER_NATIVE= getopt skey tcp_wrappers
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A package must have a builtin.mk file to be listed in PREFER_NATIVE, otherwise
|
|
|
|
it is simply ignored in that list.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
Chapter 11. The pkginstall framework
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
11.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.1.1. Directory manipulation
|
|
|
|
11.1.2. File manipulation
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.2. Configuration files
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
|
|
|
|
11.2.2. Telling the software were configuration files are
|
|
|
|
11.2.3. Patching installations
|
|
|
|
11.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.3. System startup scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.4. System users and groups
|
|
|
|
11.5. System shells
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.5.1. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This chapter describes the framework known as pkginstall, whose key features
|
|
|
|
are:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Generic installation and manipulation of directories and files outside the
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc-handled tree, LOCALBASE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Automatic handling of configuration files during installation, provided
|
|
|
|
that packages are correctly designed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Generation and installation of system startup scripts.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Registration of system users and groups.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Registration of system shells.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following sections inspect each of the above points in detail. Note that,
|
|
|
|
in order to use any of the described functionalities, you must add the
|
|
|
|
following to your package's Makefile:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
USE_PKGINSTALL=YES
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may be thinking that many of the things described here could be easily done
|
|
|
|
with simple code in the package's post-installation target (post-install). This
|
|
|
|
is incorrect, as the code in them is only executed when building from source.
|
|
|
|
Machines using binary packages could not benefit from it at all (as the code
|
|
|
|
itself could be unavailable). Therefore, the only way to achieve any of the
|
|
|
|
items described above is by means of the installation scripts, which are
|
|
|
|
automatically generated by pkginstall.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As you already know, the PLIST file holds a list of files and directories that
|
|
|
|
belong to a package. The names used in it are relative to the installation
|
|
|
|
prefix (${PREFIX}), which means that it cannot register files outside this
|
|
|
|
directory (absolute path names are not allowed). Despite this restriction, some
|
|
|
|
packages need to install files outside this location; e.g., under ${VARBASE} or
|
|
|
|
${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The only way to achieve this is to create such files during installation time
|
|
|
|
by using the installation scripts. These scripts can run arbitrary commands, so
|
|
|
|
they have the potential to create and manage files anywhere in the filesystem.
|
|
|
|
Here is where pkginstall comes into play: it provides generic scripts to
|
|
|
|
abstract the manipulation of such files and directories based on variables set
|
|
|
|
in the package's Makefile. The rest of this section describes which these
|
|
|
|
variables are.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.1.1. Directory manipulation
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following variables can be set to request the creation of directories
|
|
|
|
anywhere in the filesystem:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* MAKE_DIRS and OWN_DIRS contain a list of directories that should be created
|
|
|
|
and should attempt to be destroyed by the installation scripts. The
|
|
|
|
difference between the two is that the latter prompts the administrator to
|
|
|
|
remove any directories that may be left after deinstallation (because they
|
|
|
|
were not empty), while the former does not.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* MAKE_DIRS_PERMS and OWN_DIRS_PERMS contain a list of tuples describing
|
|
|
|
which directories should be created and should attempt to be destroyed by
|
|
|
|
the installation scripts. Each tuple holds the following values, separated
|
|
|
|
by spaces: the directory name, its owner, its group and its numerical mode.
|
|
|
|
For example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MAKE_DIRS_PERMS+= ${VARBASE}/foo/private ${ROOT_USER} ${ROOT_GROUP} 0700
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The difference between the two is exactly the same as their non-PERMS
|
|
|
|
counterparts.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.1.2. File manipulation
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Creating non-empty files outside the installation prefix is tricky because the
|
|
|
|
PLIST forces all files to be inside it. To overcome this problem, the only
|
|
|
|
solution is to extract the file in the known place (i.e., inside the
|
|
|
|
installation prefix) and copy it to the appropriate location during
|
|
|
|
installation (done by the installation scripts generated by pkginstall). We
|
|
|
|
will call the former the master file in the following paragraphs, which
|
|
|
|
describe the variables that can be used to automatically and consistently
|
|
|
|
handle files outside the installation prefix:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* CONF_FILES and SUPPORT_FILES are pairs of master and target files. During
|
|
|
|
installation time, the master file is copied to the target one if and only
|
|
|
|
if the latter does not exist. Upon deinstallation, the target file is
|
|
|
|
removed provided that it was not modified by the installation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The difference between the two is that the latter prompts the administrator
|
|
|
|
to remove any files that may be left after deinstallation (because they
|
|
|
|
were not empty), while the former does not.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* CONF_FILES_PERMS and SUPPORT_FILES_PERMS contain tuples describing master
|
|
|
|
files as well as their target locations. For each of them, it also
|
|
|
|
specifies their owner, their group and their numeric permissions, in this
|
|
|
|
order. For example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
SUPPORT_FILES_PERMS+= ${PREFIX}/share/somefile ${VARBASE}/somefile ${ROOT_USER} ${ROOT_GROUP} 0700
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The difference between the two is exactly the same as their non-PERMS
|
|
|
|
counterparts.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.2. Configuration files
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Configuration files are special in the sense that they are installed in their
|
|
|
|
own specific directory, PKG_SYSCONFDIR, and need special treatment during
|
|
|
|
installation (most of which is automated by pkginstall). The main concept you
|
|
|
|
must bear in mind is that files marked as a configuration are automatically
|
|
|
|
copied to the right place (somewhere inside PKG_SYSCONFDIR) during installation
|
|
|
|
if and only if they didn't exist before. Similarly, they will not be removed if
|
|
|
|
they have local modifications. This ensures that administrators never loose any
|
|
|
|
custom changes they may have made.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As said before, the PKG_SYSCONFDIR variable specifies where configuration files
|
|
|
|
shall be installed. Its contents are set based upon the following variables:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFBASE: The configuration's root directory. Defaults to ${PREFIX}/
|
|
|
|
etc although may be overridden by the user to point to his preferred
|
|
|
|
location (e.g., /etc, /etc/pkg, etc.). Packages must not use it directly.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR: A subdirectory of PKG_SYSCONFBASE under which the
|
|
|
|
configuration files for the package being built shall be installed. The
|
|
|
|
definition of this variable only makes sense in the package's Makefile
|
|
|
|
(i.e., it is not user customizable).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As an example, consider the Apache package, www/apache2, which places its
|
|
|
|
configuration files under the httpd/ subdirectory of PKG_SYSCONFBASE. This
|
|
|
|
should be set in the package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFVAR: Specifies the name of the variable that holds this
|
|
|
|
package's configuration directory (if different from PKG_SYSCONFBASE). It
|
|
|
|
defaults to PKGBASE's value, and is always prefixed with PKG_SYSCONFDIR.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR}: Holds the directory where the
|
|
|
|
configuration files for the package identified by PKG_SYSCONFVAR's shall be
|
|
|
|
placed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Based on the above variables, pkginstall determines the value of
|
|
|
|
PKG_SYSCONFDIR, which is the only variable that can be used within a package to
|
|
|
|
refer to its configuration directory. The algorithm used to set its value is
|
|
|
|
basically the following:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. If PKG_SYSCONFDIR.${PKG_SYSCONFVAR} is set, its value is used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. If the previous variable is not defined but PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR is set in the
|
|
|
|
package's Makefile, the resulting value is ${PKG_SYSCONFBASE}/$
|
|
|
|
{PKG_SYSCONFSUBDIR}.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. Otherwise, it is set to ${PKG_SYSCONFBASE}.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is worth mentioning that ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR} is automatically added to
|
|
|
|
OWN_DIRS. See Section 11.1.1, "Directory manipulation" what this means.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.2.2. Telling the software were configuration files are
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Given that pkgsrc (and users!) expect configuration files to be in a known
|
|
|
|
place, you need to teach each package where shall it install its files. In some
|
|
|
|
cases you will have to patch the package Makefiles to achieve it. If you are
|
|
|
|
lucky, though, it may be as easy as passing an extra flag to the configuration
|
|
|
|
script; this is the case of GNU Autoconf generated files:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --sysconfdir=${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that this specifies where the package has to look for its configuration
|
|
|
|
files, not where they will be originally installed (although the difference is
|
|
|
|
never explicit, unfortunately).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.2.3. Patching installations
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As said before, pkginstall automatically handles configuration files. This
|
|
|
|
means that the packages themselves must not touch the contents of $
|
|
|
|
{PKG_SYSCONFDIR} directly. Bad news is that the software they build will, out
|
|
|
|
of the box, mess with the contents of that directory. So which is the correct
|
|
|
|
procedure to fix this issue?
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You must teach the package (usually by manually patching it) to install any
|
|
|
|
configuration files under the examples hierarchy, share/examples/${PKGBASE}/.
|
|
|
|
This way, the PLIST registers them and the administrator always has the
|
|
|
|
original copies available.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Once the required configuration files are in place (i.e., under the examples
|
|
|
|
hierarchy), the pkginstall framework can use them as master copies during the
|
|
|
|
package installation to update what is in ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}. To achieve this,
|
|
|
|
the variables CONF_FILES and CONF_FILES_PERMS are used. Check out Section
|
|
|
|
11.1.2, "File manipulation" for information about their syntax and their
|
|
|
|
purpose. Here is an example, taken from the mail/mutt package:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
EGDIR= ${PREFIX}/share/doc/mutt/samples
|
|
|
|
CONF_FILES= ${EGDIR}/Muttrc ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}/Muttrc
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that the EGDIR variable is specific to that package and has no meaning
|
|
|
|
outside it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The automatic copying of config files can be toggled by setting the environment
|
|
|
|
variable PKG_CONFIG prior to package installation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.3. System startup scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
System startup scripts are special files because they must be installed in a
|
|
|
|
place known by the underlying OS, usually outside the installation prefix.
|
|
|
|
Therefore, the same rules described in Section 11.1, "Files and directories
|
|
|
|
outside the installation prefix" apply, and the same solutions can be used.
|
|
|
|
However, pkginstall provides a specific mechanism to handle these files, given
|
|
|
|
that they are special.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In order to provide system startup scripts, the package has to:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Store the script inside ${FILESDIR}, with the .sh suffix appended.
|
|
|
|
Considering the print/cups package as an example, it has the cupsd.sh in
|
|
|
|
its files directory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Tell pkginstall to handle it, appending the name of the script, without its
|
|
|
|
extension, to the RCD_SCRIPTS variable. Continuing the previous example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
RCD_SCRIPTS+= cupsd
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Once this is done, pkginstall will do the following steps for each script in an
|
|
|
|
automated fashion:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Process the file found in the files directory applying all the
|
|
|
|
substitutions described in the FILES_SUBST variable.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Copy the script from the files directory to the examples hierarchy, $
|
|
|
|
{PREFIX}/share/examples/rc.d/. Note that the master file must be explicitly
|
|
|
|
registered in the PLIST.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. Add code to the installation scripts to copy the startup script from the
|
|
|
|
examples hierarchy into the system-wide startup scripts directory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The automatic copying of config files can be toggled by setting the environment
|
|
|
|
variable PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS prior to package installation. Note that the scripts
|
|
|
|
will be always copied inside the examples hierarchy, ${PREFIX}/share/examples/
|
|
|
|
rc.d/, no matter what the value of this variable is.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.4. System users and groups
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a package needs to create special users and/or groups during installation,
|
|
|
|
it can do so by using the pkginstall framework.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Users can be created by adding entries to the PKG_USERS variable. Each entry
|
|
|
|
has the following syntax, which mimics /etc/passwd:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
user:group[:[userid][:[descr][:[home][:shell]]]]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Only the user and group are required; everything else is optional, but the
|
|
|
|
colons must be in the right places when specifying optional bits. By default, a
|
|
|
|
new user will have home directory /nonexistent, and login shell /sbin/nologin
|
|
|
|
unless they are specified as part of the user element. Note that if the
|
|
|
|
description contains spaces, then spaces should be double backslash-escaped, as
|
|
|
|
in:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
foo:foogrp::The\\ Foomister
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Similarly, groups can be created using the PKG_GROUPS variable, whose syntax
|
|
|
|
is:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
group[:groupid]
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
As before, only the group name is required; the numeric identifier is optional.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.5. System shells
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Packages that install system shells should register them in the shell database,
|
|
|
|
/etc/shells, to make things easier to the administrator. This must be done from
|
|
|
|
the installation scripts to keep binary packages working on any system.
|
|
|
|
pkginstall provides an easy way to accomplish this task.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When a package provides a shell interpreter, it has to set the PKG_SHELL
|
|
|
|
variable to its absolute file name. This will add some hooks to the
|
|
|
|
installation scripts to handle it. Consider the following example, taken from
|
|
|
|
shells/zsh:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
USE_PKGINSTALL= YES
|
|
|
|
PKG_SHELL= ${PREFIX}/bin/zsh
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
11.5.1. Disabling handling of configuration files
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The automatic registration of shell interpreters can be disabled by the
|
|
|
|
administrator by setting the PKG_REGISTER_SHELLS environment variable to NO.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Chapter 12. Options handling
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
12.1. Global default options
|
|
|
|
12.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Many packages have the ability to be built to support different sets of
|
|
|
|
features. bsd.options.mk is a framework in pkgsrc that provides generic
|
|
|
|
handling of those options that determine different ways in which the packages
|
|
|
|
can be built. It's possible for the user to specify exactly which sets of
|
|
|
|
options will be built into a package or to allow a set of global default
|
|
|
|
options apply.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
12.1. Global default options
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Global default options are listed in PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS, which is a list of
|
|
|
|
the options that should be built into every package if that option is
|
|
|
|
supported. This variable should be set in /etc/mk.conf.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
12.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
The following example shows how bsd.options.mk should be used by the
|
|
|
|
hypothetical ``wibble'' package, either in the package Makefile, or in a file,
|
|
|
|
e.g. options.mk, that is included by the main package Makefile.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# Global and legacy options
|
|
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR= PKG_OPTIONS.wibble
|
|
|
|
PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS= ldap sasl
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS= sasl
|
|
|
|
PKG_OPTION_LEGACY_VARS= WIBBLE_USE_OPENLDAP:ldap USE_SASL2:sasl
|
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.options.mk"
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# Package-specific option-handling
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
###
|
|
|
|
### LDAP support
|
|
|
|
###
|
|
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mldap)
|
|
|
|
. include "../../databases/openldap/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-ldap=${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.openldap}
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
###
|
|
|
|
### SASL authentication
|
|
|
|
###
|
|
|
|
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Msasl)
|
|
|
|
. include "../../security/cyrus-sasl2/buildlink3.mk"
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-sasl=${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.sasl}
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-20 12:04:41 +02:00
|
|
|
The first section contains the information about which build options are
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
supported by the package, and any default options settings if needed.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
1. PKG_OPTIONS_VAR is the name of the make(1) variable that contains the
|
|
|
|
options the user wishes to select. The recommended value is "PKG_OPTIONS.
|
|
|
|
pkg" but any package-specific value may be used. This variable should be
|
|
|
|
set in a package Makefile.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS is a list of build options supported by the package.
|
|
|
|
This variable should be set in a package Makefile.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
3. PKG_SUGGESTED_OPTIONS is a list of build options which are enabled by
|
|
|
|
default.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
4. ${PKG_OPTIONS_VAR} (the variable named in PKG_OPTIONS_VAR) lists the
|
|
|
|
selected build options and overrides any default options given in
|
|
|
|
PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS. If any of the options begin with a "-", then that
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
option is always removed from the selected build options, e.g.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS= kerberos ldap sasl
|
|
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR= WIBBLE_OPTIONS
|
|
|
|
WIBBLE_OPTIONS= ${PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS} -sasl
|
2005-05-20 12:04:41 +02:00
|
|
|
# leads to PKG_OPTIONS = kerberos ldap
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
or
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
PKG_OPTIONS_VAR= WIBBLE_OPTIONS
|
|
|
|
WIBBLE_OPTIONS= kerberos -ldap ldap
|
2005-05-20 12:04:41 +02:00
|
|
|
# leads to PKG_OPTIONS = kerberos
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This variable should be set in /etc/mk.conf.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-20 12:04:41 +02:00
|
|
|
5. The PKG_OPTIONS_LEGACY_VARS is only needed if you are converting a package
|
|
|
|
that had its own ad-hoc options handling to use bsd.options.mk. It converts
|
|
|
|
global or legacy options variables into an equivalent PKG_OPTIONS.pkg
|
|
|
|
value.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-20 12:04:41 +02:00
|
|
|
After the inclusion of bsd.options.mk, the variable PKG_OPTIONS contains the
|
|
|
|
list of the selected build options, properly filtered to remove unsupported and
|
|
|
|
duplicate options.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The remaining sections contain the logic that is specific to each option. There
|
|
|
|
should be a check for every option listed in PKG_SUPPORTED_OPTIONS, and there
|
|
|
|
should be clear documentation on what turning on the option will do in the
|
|
|
|
comments preceding each section. The correct way to check for an option is to
|
|
|
|
check whether it is listed in PKG_OPTIONS.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
Chapter 13. The build process
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
13.1. Program location
|
|
|
|
13.2. Main targets
|
|
|
|
13.3. Other helpful targets
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The basic steps for building a program are always the same. First the program's
|
|
|
|
source (distfile) must be brought to the local system and then extracted. After
|
|
|
|
any patches to compile properly on NetBSD are applied, the software can be
|
|
|
|
configured, then built (usually by compiling), and finally the generated
|
|
|
|
binaries, etc. can be put into place on the system. These are exactly the steps
|
|
|
|
performed by the NetBSD package system, which is implemented as a series of
|
|
|
|
targets in a central Makefile, pkgsrc/mk/bsd.pkg.mk.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
13.1. Program location
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Before outlining the process performed by the NetBSD package system in the next
|
|
|
|
section, here's a brief discussion on where programs are installed, and which
|
|
|
|
variables influence this.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The automatic variable PREFIX indicates where all files of the final program
|
|
|
|
shall be installed. It is usually set to LOCALBASE (/usr/pkg), or CROSSBASE for
|
|
|
|
pkgs in the "cross" category. The value of PREFIX needs to be put into the
|
|
|
|
various places in the program's source where paths to these files are encoded.
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
See Section 7.3, "patches/*" and Section 14.3.1, "Shared libraries - libtool"
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
for more details.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When choosing which of these variables to use, follow the following rules:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* PREFIX always points to the location where the current pkg will be
|
|
|
|
installed. When referring to a pkg's own installation path, use "${PREFIX}
|
|
|
|
".
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* LOCALBASE is where all non-X11 pkgs are installed. If you need to construct
|
|
|
|
a -I or -L argument to the compiler to find includes and libraries
|
|
|
|
installed by another non-X11 pkg, use "${LOCALBASE}".
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* X11BASE is where the actual X11 distribution (from xsrc, etc.) is
|
|
|
|
installed. When looking for standard X11 includes (not those installed by a
|
|
|
|
pkg), use "${X11BASE}".
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* X11 based are special in that they may be installed in either X11BASE or
|
|
|
|
LOCALBASE.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Usually, X11 packages should be installed under LOCALBASE whenever
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
possible. Note that you will need to include ../../mk/x11.buildlink3.mk in
|
|
|
|
them to request the presence of X11 and to get the right compilation flags.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Even though, there are some packages that cannot be installed under
|
|
|
|
LOCALBASE: those that come with app-defaults files. These packages are
|
|
|
|
special and they must be placed under X11BASE. To accomplish this, set
|
|
|
|
either USE_X11BASE or USE_IMAKE in your package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-01 23:03:16 +02:00
|
|
|
Some notes: If you need to find includes or libraries installed by a pkg
|
|
|
|
that has USE_IMAKE or USE_X11BASE in its pkg Makefile, you need to look in
|
|
|
|
both ${X11BASE} and ${LOCALBASE}. To force installation of all X11 packages
|
|
|
|
in LOCALBASE, the pkgtools/xpkgwedge package is enabled by default.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* X11PREFIX should be used to refer to the installed location of an X11
|
|
|
|
package. X11PREFIX will be set to X11BASE if xpkgwedge is not installed,
|
|
|
|
and to LOCALBASE if xpkgwedge is installed.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* If xpkgwedge is installed, it is possible to have some packages installed
|
|
|
|
in X11BASE and some in LOCALBASE. To determine the prefix of an installed
|
|
|
|
package, the EVAL_PREFIX definition can be used. It takes pairs in the
|
|
|
|
format "DIRNAME=<package>", and the make(1) variable DIRNAME will be set to
|
|
|
|
the prefix of the installed package <package>, or "${X11PREFIX}" if the
|
|
|
|
package is not installed.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This is best illustrated by example.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The following lines are taken from pkgsrc/wm/scwm/Makefile:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-01-11 16:48:17 +01:00
|
|
|
EVAL_PREFIX+= GTKDIR=gtk+
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --with-guile-prefix=${LOCALBASE} \
|
|
|
|
--with-gtk-prefix="${GTKDIR}" \
|
|
|
|
--enable-multibyte
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Specific defaults can be defined for the packages evaluated using
|
|
|
|
EVAL_PREFIX, by using a definition of the form:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
GTKDIR_DEFAULT= ${LOCALBASE}
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
where GTKDIR corresponds to the first definition in the EVAL_PREFIX pair.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Within ${PREFIX}, packages should install files according to hier(7), with
|
|
|
|
the exception that manual pages go into ${PREFIX}/man, not ${PREFIX}/share/
|
|
|
|
man.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
13.2. Main targets
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The main targets used during the build process defined in bsd.pkg.mk are:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
fetch
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This will check if the file(s) given in the variables DISTFILES and
|
|
|
|
PATCHFILES (as defined in the package's Makefile) are present on the local
|
|
|
|
system in /usr/pkgsrc/distfiles. If they are not present, an attempt will
|
|
|
|
be made to fetch them using commands of the form:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
${FETCH_CMD} ${FETCH_BEFORE_ARGS} ${site}${file} ${FETCH_AFTER_ARGS}
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
where ${site} varies through several possibilities in turn: first,
|
|
|
|
MASTER_SITE_OVERRIDE is tried, then the sites specified in either
|
|
|
|
SITES_file if defined, else MASTER_SITES or PATCH_SITES, as applies, then
|
|
|
|
finally the value of MASTER_SITE_BACKUP. The order of all except the first
|
|
|
|
can be optionally sorted by the user, via setting either MASTER_SORT_AWK or
|
|
|
|
MASTER_SORT_REGEX.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
checksum
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
After the distfile(s) are fetched, their checksum is generated and compared
|
|
|
|
with the checksums stored in the distinfo file. If the checksums don't
|
|
|
|
match, the build is aborted. This is to ensure the same distfile is used
|
|
|
|
for building, and that the distfile wasn't changed, e.g. by some malign
|
|
|
|
force, deliberately changed distfiles on the master distribution site or
|
|
|
|
network lossage.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
extract
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
When the distfiles are present on the local system, they need to be
|
|
|
|
extracted, as they are usually in the form of some compressed archive
|
|
|
|
format, most commonly .tar.gz.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
If only some of the distfiles need to be uncompressed, the files to be
|
|
|
|
uncompressed should be put into EXTRACT_ONLY.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
If the distfiles are not in .tar.gz format, they can be extracted by
|
|
|
|
setting either EXTRACT_SUFX, or EXTRACT_CMD, EXTRACT_BEFORE_ARGS and
|
|
|
|
EXTRACT_AFTER_ARGS. In the former case, pkgsrc knows how to extract a
|
|
|
|
number of suffixes (.tar.gz, .tgz, .tar.gz2, .tbz, .tar.Z, .tar, .shar.gz,
|
|
|
|
.shar.bz2, .shar.Z, .shar, .Z, .bz2 and .gz; see the definition of the
|
|
|
|
various DECOMPRESS_CMD variables bsd.pkg.mk for a complete list). Here's an
|
|
|
|
example on how to use the other variables for a program that comes with a
|
|
|
|
compressed shell archive whose name ends in .msg.gz:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
EXTRACT_SUFX= .msg.gz
|
|
|
|
EXTRACT_CMD= zcat
|
|
|
|
EXTRACT_BEFORE_ARGS=
|
|
|
|
EXTRACT_AFTER_ARGS= |sh
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
patch
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
After extraction, all the patches named by the PATCHFILES, those present in
|
|
|
|
the patches subdirectory of the package as well as in $LOCALPATCHES/
|
|
|
|
$PKGPATH (e.g. /usr/local/patches/graphics/png) are applied. Patchfiles
|
|
|
|
ending in .Z or .gz are uncompressed before they are applied, files ending
|
|
|
|
in .orig or .rej are ignored. Any special options to patch(1) can be handed
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
in PATCH_DIST_ARGS. See Section 7.3, "patches/*" for more details.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
By default patch(1) is given special args to make it fail if the patches
|
|
|
|
apply with some lines of fuzz. Please fix (regen) the patches so that they
|
|
|
|
apply cleanly. The rationale behind this is that patches that don't apply
|
|
|
|
cleanly may end up being applied in the wrong place, and cause severe harm
|
|
|
|
there.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
configure
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Most pieces of software need information on the header files, system calls,
|
|
|
|
and library routines which are available in NetBSD. This is the process
|
|
|
|
known as configuration, and is usually automated. In most cases, a script
|
|
|
|
is supplied with the source, and its invocation results in generation of
|
|
|
|
header files, Makefiles, etc.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
If the program's distfile contains its own configure script, this can be
|
|
|
|
invoked by setting HAS_CONFIGURE. If the configure script is a GNU autoconf
|
|
|
|
script, GNU_CONFIGURE should be specified instead. In either case, any
|
|
|
|
arguments to the configure script can be specified in the CONFIGURE_ARGS
|
|
|
|
variable, and the configure script's name can be set in CONFIGURE_SCRIPT if
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
it differs from the default "configure". Here's an example from the
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
sysutils/top package:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
HAS_CONFIGURE= yes
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_SCRIPT= Configure
|
|
|
|
CONFIGURE_ARGS+= netbsd13
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
If the program uses an Imakefile for configuration, the appropriate steps
|
|
|
|
can be invoked by setting USE_IMAKE to "YES". (If you only want the package
|
|
|
|
installed in $X11PREFIX but xmkmf not being run, set USE_X11BASE instead!)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
build
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Once configuration has taken place, the software will be built by invoking
|
2004-12-03 13:48:15 +01:00
|
|
|
$MAKE_PROGRAM on $MAKEFILE with $BUILD_TARGET as the target to build. The
|
2005-05-24 13:11:24 +02:00
|
|
|
default MAKE_PROGRAM is "gmake" if USE_TOOLS contains "gmake", "make"
|
2004-12-03 13:48:15 +01:00
|
|
|
otherwise. MAKEFILE is set to "Makefile" by default, and BUILD_TARGET
|
2004-11-22 17:52:08 +01:00
|
|
|
defaults to "all". Any of these variables can be set in the package's
|
|
|
|
Makefile to change the default build process.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
install
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Once the build stage has completed, the final step is to install the
|
|
|
|
software in public directories, so users can access the programs and files.
|
|
|
|
As in the build-target, $MAKE_PROGRAM is invoked on $MAKEFILE here, but
|
|
|
|
with the $INSTALL_TARGET instead, the latter defaulting to "install" (plus
|
|
|
|
"install.man", if USE_IMAKE is set).
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
If no target is specified, the default is "build". If a subsequent stage is
|
|
|
|
requested, all prior stages are made: e.g. make build will also perform the
|
|
|
|
equivalent of:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
make fetch
|
|
|
|
make checksum
|
|
|
|
make extract
|
|
|
|
make patch
|
|
|
|
make configure
|
|
|
|
make build
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
13.3. Other helpful targets
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pre/post-*
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
For any of the main targets described in the previous section, two
|
|
|
|
auxiliary targets exist with "pre-" and "post-" used as a prefix for the
|
|
|
|
main target's name. These targets are invoked before and after the main
|
|
|
|
target is called, allowing extra configuration or installation steps be
|
|
|
|
performed from a package's Makefile, for example, which a program's
|
|
|
|
configure script or install target omitted.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
do-*
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Should one of the main targets do the wrong thing, and should there be no
|
|
|
|
variable to fix this, you can redefine it with the do-* target. (Note that
|
|
|
|
redefining the target itself instead of the do-* target is a bad idea, as
|
|
|
|
the pre-* and post-* targets won't be called anymore, etc.) You will not
|
|
|
|
usually need to do this.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
reinstall
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
If you did a make install and you noticed some file was not installed
|
|
|
|
properly, you can repeat the installation with this target, which will
|
|
|
|
ignore the "already installed" flag.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
deinstall
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This target does a pkg_delete(1) in the current directory, effectively
|
|
|
|
de-installing the package. The following variables can be used to tune the
|
|
|
|
behaviour:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
PKG_VERBOSE
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Add a "-v" to the pkg_delete(1) command.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
DEINSTALLDEPENDS
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Remove all packages that require (depend on) the given package. This
|
|
|
|
can be used to remove any packages that may have been pulled in by a
|
|
|
|
given package, e.g. if make deinstall DEINSTALLDEPENDS=1 is done in
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc/x11/kde, this is likely to remove whole KDE. Works by adding
|
|
|
|
"-R" to the pkg_delete(1) command line.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
update
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This target causes the current package to be updated to the latest version.
|
|
|
|
The package and all depending packages first get de-installed, then current
|
|
|
|
versions of the corresponding packages get compiled and installed. This is
|
|
|
|
similar to manually noting which packages are currently installed, then
|
|
|
|
performing a series of make deinstall and make install (or whatever
|
|
|
|
UPDATE_TARGET is set to) for these packages.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
You can use the "update" target to resume package updating in case a
|
|
|
|
previous make update was interrupted for some reason. However, in this
|
|
|
|
case, make sure you don't call make clean or otherwise remove the list of
|
|
|
|
dependent packages in WRKDIR. Otherwise you lose the ability to
|
|
|
|
automatically update the current package along with the dependent packages
|
|
|
|
you have installed.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Resuming an interrupted make update will only work as long as the package
|
|
|
|
tree remains unchanged. If the source code for one of the packages to be
|
|
|
|
updated has been changed, resuming make update will most certainly fail!
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The following variables can be used either on the command line or in /etc/
|
|
|
|
mk.conf to alter the behaviour of make update:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
UPDATE_TARGET
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Install target to recursively use for the updated package and the
|
|
|
|
dependent packages. Defaults to DEPENDS_TARGET if set, "install"
|
|
|
|
otherwise for make update. e.g. make update UPDATE_TARGET=package
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
NOCLEAN
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Don't clean up after updating. Useful if you want to leave the work
|
|
|
|
sources of the updated packages around for inspection or other
|
|
|
|
purposes. Be sure you eventually clean up the source tree (see the
|
|
|
|
"clean-update" target below) or you may run into troubles with old
|
|
|
|
source code still lying around on your next make or make update.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
REINSTALL
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Deinstall each package before installing (making DEPENDS_TARGET). This
|
|
|
|
may be necessary if the "clean-update" target (see below) was called
|
|
|
|
after interrupting a running make update.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
DEPENDS_TARGET
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Allows you to disable recursion and hardcode the target for packages.
|
|
|
|
The default is "update" for the update target, facilitating a recursive
|
|
|
|
update of prerequisite packages. Only set DEPENDS_TARGET if you want to
|
|
|
|
disable recursive updates. Use UPDATE_TARGET instead to just set a
|
|
|
|
specific target for each package to be installed during make update
|
|
|
|
(see above).
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
clean-update
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Clean the source tree for all packages that would get updated if make
|
|
|
|
update was called from the current directory. This target should not be
|
|
|
|
used if the current package (or any of its depending packages) have already
|
|
|
|
been de-installed (e.g., after calling make update) or you may lose some
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
packages you intended to update. As a rule of thumb: only use this target
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
before the first time you run make update and only if you have a dirty
|
|
|
|
package tree (e.g., if you used NOCLEAN).
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you unsure about whether your tree is clean you can either perform a
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
make clean at the top of the tree, or use the following sequence of
|
|
|
|
commands from the directory of the package you want to update (before
|
|
|
|
running make update for the first time, otherwise you lose all the packages
|
|
|
|
you wanted to update!):
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# make clean-update
|
|
|
|
# make clean CLEANDEPENDS=YES
|
|
|
|
# make update
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The following variables can be used either on the command line or in /etc/
|
|
|
|
mk.conf to alter the behaviour of make clean-update:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
CLEAR_DIRLIST
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
After make clean, do not reconstruct the list of directories to update
|
|
|
|
for this package. Only use this if make update successfully installed
|
|
|
|
all packages you wanted to update. Normally, this is done automatically
|
|
|
|
on make update, but may have been suppressed by the NOCLEAN variable
|
|
|
|
(see above).
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
info
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This target invokes pkg_info(1) for the current package. You can use this
|
|
|
|
to check which version of a package is installed.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
readme
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This target generates a README.html file, which can be viewed using a
|
|
|
|
browser such as www/mozilla or www/links. The generated files contain
|
|
|
|
references to any packages which are in the PACKAGES directory on the local
|
|
|
|
host. The generated files can be made to refer to URLs based on
|
|
|
|
FTP_PKG_URL_HOST and FTP_PKG_URL_DIR. For example, if I wanted to generate
|
|
|
|
README.html files which pointed to binary packages on the local machine, in
|
|
|
|
the directory /usr/packages, set FTP_PKG_URL_HOST=file://localhost and
|
|
|
|
FTP_PKG_URL_DIR=/usr/packages. The ${PACKAGES} directory and its
|
|
|
|
subdirectories will be searched for all the binary packages.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
readme-all
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Use this target to create a file README-all.html which contains a list of
|
|
|
|
all packages currently available in the NetBSD Packages Collection,
|
|
|
|
together with the category they belong to and a short description. This
|
|
|
|
file is compiled from the pkgsrc/*/README.html files, so be sure to run
|
|
|
|
this after a make readme.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
cdrom-readme
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This is very much the same as the "readme" target (see above), but is to be
|
|
|
|
used when generating a pkgsrc tree to be written to a CD-ROM. This target
|
|
|
|
also produces README.html files, and can be made to refer to URLs based on
|
|
|
|
CDROM_PKG_URL_HOST and CDROM_PKG_URL_DIR.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
show-distfiles
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This target shows which distfiles and patchfiles are needed to build the
|
|
|
|
package. (DISTFILES and PATCHFILES, but not patches/*)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
show-downlevel
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This target shows nothing if the package is not installed. If a version of
|
|
|
|
this package is installed, but is not the version provided in this version
|
|
|
|
of pkgsrc, then a warning message is displayed. This target can be used to
|
|
|
|
show which of your installed packages are downlevel, and so the old
|
|
|
|
versions can be deleted, and the current ones added.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
show-pkgsrc-dir
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This target shows the directory in the pkgsrc hierarchy from which the
|
|
|
|
package can be built and installed. This may not be the same directory as
|
|
|
|
the one from which the package was installed. This target is intended to be
|
|
|
|
used by people who may wish to upgrade many packages on a single host, and
|
|
|
|
can be invoked from the top-level pkgsrc Makefile by using the
|
|
|
|
"show-host-specific-pkgs" target.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
show-installed-depends
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This target shows which installed packages match the current package's
|
|
|
|
DEPENDS. Useful if out of date dependencies are causing build problems.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
check-shlibs
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
After a package is installed, check all its binaries and (on ELF platforms)
|
|
|
|
shared libraries to see if they find the shared libs they need. Run by
|
|
|
|
default if PKG_DEVELOPER is set in /etc/mk.conf.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
print-PLIST
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
After a "make install" from a new or upgraded pkg, this prints out an
|
|
|
|
attempt to generate a new PLIST from a find -newer work/.extract_done. An
|
|
|
|
attempt is made to care for shared libs etc., but it is strongly
|
|
|
|
recommended to review the result before putting it into PLIST. On upgrades,
|
|
|
|
it's useful to diff the output of this command against an already existing
|
|
|
|
PLIST file.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
If the package installs files via tar(1) or other methods that don't update
|
|
|
|
file access times, be sure to add these files manually to your PLIST, as
|
|
|
|
the "find -newer" command used by this target won't catch them!
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
See Section 9.3, "Tweaking output of make print-PLIST" for more information
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
on this target.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
bulk-package
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Used to do bulk builds. If an appropriate binary package already exists, no
|
|
|
|
action is taken. If not, this target will compile, install and package it
|
|
|
|
(and it's depends, if PKG_DEPENDS is set properly. See Section 5.3.1,
|
|
|
|
"Configuration". After creating the binary package, the sources, the
|
|
|
|
just-installed package and it's required packages are removed, preserving
|
|
|
|
free disk space.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Beware that this target may deinstall all packages installed on a system!
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
bulk-install
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Used during bulk-installs to install required packages. If an upto-date
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
binary package is available, it will be installed via pkg_add(1). If not,
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
make bulk-package will be executed, but the installed binary not be
|
|
|
|
removed.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
A binary package is considered "upto-date" to be installed via pkg_add(1)
|
|
|
|
if:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* None of the package's files (Makefile, ...) were modified since it was
|
|
|
|
built.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* None of the package's required (binary) packages were modified since it
|
|
|
|
was built.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Beware that this target may deinstall all packages installed on a system!
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
Chapter 14. Notes on fixes for packages
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1. General operation
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
14.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
|
|
|
|
14.1.2. Where to install documentation
|
|
|
|
14.1.3. Restricted packages
|
|
|
|
14.1.4. Handling dependencies
|
|
|
|
14.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
|
|
|
|
14.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
|
|
|
|
14.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
|
|
|
|
14.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
|
|
|
|
14.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
|
|
|
|
14.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing
|
2005-05-26 18:32:42 +02:00
|
|
|
package
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.11. Portability of packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.2. Possible downloading issues
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
|
|
|
|
14.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.3. Configuration gotchas
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
|
|
|
|
14.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
|
|
|
|
14.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.4. Building considerations
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.4.1. CPP defines
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5. Package specific actions
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.1. User interaction
|
|
|
|
14.5.2. Handling licenses
|
|
|
|
14.5.3. Installing score files
|
|
|
|
14.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts
|
|
|
|
14.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
|
|
|
|
14.5.6. Packages installing perl modules
|
|
|
|
14.5.7. Packages installing info files
|
|
|
|
14.5.8. Packages installing GConf2 data files
|
|
|
|
14.5.9. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
|
|
|
|
14.5.10. Packages installing X11 fonts
|
|
|
|
14.5.11. Packages installing GTK2 modules
|
|
|
|
14.5.12. Packages installing SGML or XML data
|
|
|
|
14.5.13. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
|
|
|
|
14.5.14. Packages using intltool
|
|
|
|
14.5.15. Packages installing startup scripts
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.6. Feedback to the author
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1. General operation
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The problem with package-defined variables that can be overridden via MAKECONF
|
|
|
|
or /etc/mk.conf is that make(1) expands a variable as it is used, but evaluates
|
|
|
|
preprocessor like statements (.if, .ifdef and .ifndef) as they are read. So, to
|
|
|
|
use any variable (which may be set in /etc/mk.conf) in one of the .if*
|
|
|
|
statements, the file /etc/mk.conf must be included before that .if* statement.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Rather than have a number of ad-hoc ways of including /etc/mk.conf, should it
|
|
|
|
exist, or MAKECONF, should it exist, include the pkgsrc/mk/bsd.prefs.mk file in
|
|
|
|
the package Makefile before any preprocessor-like .if, .ifdef, or .ifndef
|
|
|
|
statements:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.prefs.mk"
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
.if defined(USE_MENUS)
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
.endif
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you wish to set the CFLAGS variable in /etc/mk.conf please make sure to use:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CFLAGS+= -your -flags
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Using CFLAGS= (i.e. without the "+") may lead to problems with packages that
|
|
|
|
need to add their own flags. Also, you may want to take a look at the devel/
|
|
|
|
cpuflags package if you're interested in optimization for the current CPU.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.2. Where to install documentation
|
2005-05-26 18:32:42 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Documentation should be installed into ${PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGBASE} or $
|
|
|
|
{PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGNAME} (the latter includes the version number of the
|
|
|
|
package).
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.3. Restricted packages
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some licenses restrict how software may be re-distributed. In order to satisfy
|
|
|
|
these restrictions, the package system defines five make variables that can be
|
|
|
|
set to note these restrictions:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* RESTRICTED
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This variable should be set whenever a restriction exists (regardless of
|
|
|
|
its kind). Set this variable to a string containing the reason for the
|
|
|
|
restriction.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* NO_BIN_ON_CDROM
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Binaries may not be placed on CD-ROM. Set this variable to ${RESTRICTED}
|
|
|
|
whenever a binary package may not be included on a CD-ROM.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* NO_BIN_ON_FTP
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Binaries may not be placed on an FTP server. Set this variable to $
|
|
|
|
{RESTRICTED} whenever a binary package may not not be made available on the
|
|
|
|
Internet.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* NO_SRC_ON_CDROM
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Distfiles may not be placed on CD-ROM. Set this variable to ${RESTRICTED}
|
|
|
|
if re-distribution of the source code or other distfile(s) is not allowed
|
|
|
|
on CD-ROMs.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* NO_SRC_ON_FTP
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Distfiles may not be placed on FTP. Set this variable to ${RESTRICTED} if
|
|
|
|
re-distribution of the source code or other distfile(s) via the Internet is
|
|
|
|
not allowed.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Please note that the use of NO_PACKAGE, IGNORE, NO_CDROM, or other generic make
|
|
|
|
variables to denote restrictions is deprecated, because they unconditionally
|
|
|
|
prevent users from generating binary packages!
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.4. Handling dependencies
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Your package may depend on some other package being present - and there are
|
|
|
|
various ways of expressing this dependency. pkgsrc supports the BUILD_DEPENDS
|
|
|
|
and DEPENDS definitions, as well as dependencies via buildlink3.mk, which is
|
|
|
|
the preferred way to handle dependencies, and which uses the variables named
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
above. See Chapter 10, Buildlink methodology for more information.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The basic difference between the two variables is as follows: The DEPENDS
|
|
|
|
definition registers that pre-requisite in the binary package so it will be
|
|
|
|
pulled in when the binary package is later installed, whilst the BUILD_DEPENDS
|
|
|
|
definition does not, marking a dependency that is only needed for building the
|
|
|
|
package.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This means that if you only need a package present whilst you are building, it
|
|
|
|
should be noted as a BUILD_DEPENDS.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The format for a BUILD_DEPENDS and a DEPENDS definition is:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
<pre-req-package-name>:../../<category>/<pre-req-package>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note that the "pre-req-package-name" may include any of the wildcard
|
2005-03-08 02:25:09 +01:00
|
|
|
version numbers recognized by pkg_info(1).
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. If your package needs another package's binaries or libraries to build or
|
|
|
|
run, and if that package has a buildlink3.mk file available, use it:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
.include "../../graphics/jpeg/buildlink3.mk"
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. If your package needs to use another package to build itself and there is
|
|
|
|
no buildlink3.mk file available, use the BUILD_DEPENDS definition:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
BUILD_DEPENDS+= autoconf-2.13:../../devel/autoconf
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. If your package needs a library with which to link and again there is no
|
|
|
|
buildlink3.mk file available, this is specified using the DEPENDS
|
|
|
|
definition. An example of this is the print/lyx package, which uses the xpm
|
|
|
|
library, version 3.4j to build:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= xpm-3.4j:../../graphics/xpm
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
You can also use wildcards in package dependences:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= xpm-[0-9]*:../../graphics/xpm
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Note that such wildcard dependencies are retained when creating binary
|
|
|
|
packages. The dependency is checked when installing the binary package and
|
|
|
|
any package which matches the pattern will be used. Wildcard dependencies
|
|
|
|
should be used with care.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The "-[0-9]*" should be used instead of "-*" to avoid potentially ambiguous
|
|
|
|
matches such as "tk-postgresql" matching a "tk-*" DEPENDS.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Wildcards can also be used to specify that a package will only build
|
|
|
|
against a certain minimum version of a pre-requisite:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= tiff>=3.5.4:../../graphics/tiff
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This means that the package will build against version 3.5.4 of the tiff
|
|
|
|
library or newer. Such a dependency may be warranted if, for example, the
|
|
|
|
API of the library has changed with version 3.5.4 and a package would not
|
|
|
|
compile against an earlier version of tiff.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Please note that such dependencies should only be updated if a package
|
|
|
|
requires a newer pre-requisite, but not to denote recommendations such as
|
|
|
|
security updates or ABI changes that do not prevent a package from building
|
|
|
|
correctly. Such recommendations can be expressed using RECOMMENDED:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
RECOMMENDED+= tiff>=3.6.1:../../graphics/tiff
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
In addition to the above DEPENDS line, this denotes that while a package
|
|
|
|
will build against tiff>=3.5.4, at least version 3.6.1 is recommended.
|
|
|
|
RECOMMENDED entries will be turned into dependencies unless explicitly
|
|
|
|
ignored (in which case a warning will be printed). Packages that are built
|
|
|
|
with recommendations ignored may not be uploaded to ftp.NetBSD.org by
|
|
|
|
developers and should not be used across different systems that may have
|
|
|
|
different versions of binary packages installed.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
For security fixes, please update the package vulnerabilities file as well
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
as setting RECOMMENDED, see Section 14.1.8, "Handling packages with
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
security problems" for more information.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4. If your package needs some executable to be able to run correctly and if
|
2005-02-10 12:30:00 +01:00
|
|
|
there's no buildlink3.mk file, this is specified using the DEPENDS
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
variable. The print/lyx package needs to be able to execute the latex
|
|
|
|
binary from the teTeX package when it runs, and that is specified:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
DEPENDS+= teTeX-[0-9]*:../../print/teTeX
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The comment about wildcard dependencies from previous paragraph applies
|
|
|
|
here, too.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
If your package needs files from another package to build, see the first part
|
|
|
|
of the "do-configure" target print/ghostscript5 package (it relies on the jpeg
|
|
|
|
sources being present in source form during the build):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
if [ ! -e ${_PKGSRCDIR}/graphics/jpeg/${WRKDIR:T}/jpeg-6b ]; then \
|
|
|
|
cd ${_PKGSRCDIR}/../../graphics/jpeg && ${MAKE} extract; \
|
|
|
|
fi
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you build any other packages that way, please make sure the working files
|
|
|
|
are deleted too when this package's working files are cleaned up. The easiest
|
|
|
|
way to do so is by adding a pre-clean target:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pre-clean:
|
|
|
|
cd ${_PKGSRCDIR}/../../graphics/jpeg && ${MAKE} clean
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please also note the BUILD_USES_MSGFMT and BUILD_USES_GETTEXT_M4 definitions,
|
|
|
|
which are provided as convenience definitions. The former works out whether
|
|
|
|
msgfmt(1) is part of the base system, and, if it isn't, installs the devel/
|
|
|
|
gettext package. The latter adds a build dependency on either an installed
|
|
|
|
version of an older gettext package, or if it isn't, installs the devel/
|
|
|
|
gettext-m4 package.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Your package may conflict with other packages a user might already have
|
|
|
|
installed on his system, e.g. if your package installs the same set of files
|
|
|
|
like another package in our pkgsrc tree.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
In this case you can set CONFLICTS to a space separated list of packages
|
|
|
|
(including version string) your package conflicts with.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For example x11/Xaw3d and x11/Xaw-Xpm install provide the same shared library,
|
|
|
|
thus you set in pkgsrc/x11/Xaw3d/Makefile:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFLICTS= Xaw-Xpm-[0-9]*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
and in pkgsrc/x11/Xaw-Xpm/Makefile:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
CONFLICTS= Xaw3d-[0-9]*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Packages will automatically conflict with other packages with the name prefix
|
|
|
|
and a different version string. "Xaw3d-1.5" e.g. will automatically conflict
|
|
|
|
with the older version "Xaw3d-1.3".
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are several reasons why a package might be instructed to not build under
|
|
|
|
certain circumstances. If the package builds and runs on most platforms, the
|
|
|
|
exceptions should be noted with NOT_FOR_PLATFORM. If the package builds and
|
|
|
|
runs on a small handful of platforms, set ONLY_FOR_PLATFORM instead. If the
|
|
|
|
package should be skipped (for example, because it provides functionality
|
|
|
|
already provided by the system), set PKG_SKIP_REASON to a descriptive message.
|
|
|
|
If the package should fail because some preconditions are not met, set
|
|
|
|
PKG_FAIL_REASON to a descriptive message.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
IGNORE is deprecated because it didn't provide enough information to determine
|
|
|
|
whether the build should fail.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To ensure that a package may not be deleted, once it has been installed, the
|
|
|
|
PKG_PRESERVE definition should be set in the package Makefile. This will be
|
|
|
|
carried into any binary package that is made from this pkgsrc entry. A
|
|
|
|
"preserved" package will not be deleted using pkg_delete(1) unless the "-f"
|
|
|
|
option is used.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When a vulnerability is found, this should be noted in localsrc/security/
|
|
|
|
advisories/pkg-vulnerabilities, and after the commit of that file, it should be
|
|
|
|
copied to both /pub/NetBSD/packages/distfiles/pkg-vulnerabilities and /pub/
|
|
|
|
NetBSD/packages/distfiles/vulnerabilities on ftp.NetBSD.org using localsrc/
|
|
|
|
security/advisories/Makefile. In addition, if a buildlink3.mk file exists for
|
|
|
|
an affected package, bumping PKGREVISION and creating a corresponding
|
2005-05-10 03:22:19 +02:00
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_RECOMMENDED.pkg entry should be considered. See Chapter 10, Buildlink
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
methodology for more information about writing buildlink3.mk files and
|
|
|
|
BUILDLINK_* definitions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Also, if the fix should be applied to the stable pkgsrc branch, be sure to
|
|
|
|
submit a pullup request!
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some source files trigger bugs in the compiler, based on combinations of
|
|
|
|
compiler version and architecture and almost always relation to optimisation
|
|
|
|
being enabled. Common symptoms are gcc internal errors or never finishing
|
|
|
|
compiling a file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Typically a workaround involves testing the MACHINE_ARCH and compiler version,
|
|
|
|
disabling optimisation for that file/MACHINE_ARCH/compiler combination, and
|
|
|
|
documenting it in pkgsrc/doc/HACKS. See that file for a number of examples!
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When making fixes to an existing package it can be useful to change the version
|
|
|
|
number in PKGNAME. To avoid conflicting with future versions by the original
|
|
|
|
author, a "nb1", "nb2", ... suffix can be used on package versions by setting
|
|
|
|
PKGREVISION=1 (2, ...). The "nb" is treated like a "." by the pkg tools. e.g.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DISTNAME= foo-17.42
|
|
|
|
PKGREVISION= 9
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
will result in a PKGNAME of "foo-17.42nb9".
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When a new release of the package is released, the PKGREVISION should be
|
|
|
|
removed. e.g. on a new minor release of the above package, things should be
|
|
|
|
like:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DISTNAME= foo-17.43
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.11. Portability of packages
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
One appealing feature of pkgsrc is that it runs on many different platforms. As
|
|
|
|
a result, it is important to ensure, where possible, that packages in pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
are portable. There are some particular details you should pay attention to
|
|
|
|
while working on pkgsrc.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.1.11.1. ${INSTALL}, ${INSTALL_DATA_DIR}, ...
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The BSD-compatible install supplied with some operating systems will not
|
|
|
|
perform more than one operation at a time. As such, you should call "${INSTALL}
|
|
|
|
", etc. like this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
${INSTALL_DATA_DIR} ${PREFIX}/dir1
|
|
|
|
${INSTALL_DATA_DIR} ${PREFIX}/dir2
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.2. Possible downloading issues
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you need to download from a dynamic URL you can set DYNAMIC_MASTER_SITES and
|
|
|
|
a make fetch will call files/getsite.sh with the name of each file to download
|
|
|
|
as an argument, expecting it to output the URL of the directory from which to
|
|
|
|
download it. graphics/ns-cult3d is an example of this usage.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the download can't be automated, because the user must submit personal
|
|
|
|
information to apply for a password, or must pay for the source, or whatever,
|
|
|
|
you can set _FETCH_MESSAGE to a macro which displays a message explaining the
|
|
|
|
situation. _FETCH_MESSAGE must be executable shell commands, not just a
|
|
|
|
message. (Generally, it executes ${ECHO}). As of this writing, the following
|
|
|
|
packages use this: audio/realplayer, cad/simian, devel/ipv6socket, emulators/
|
|
|
|
vmware-module, fonts/acroread-jpnfont, sysutils/storage-manager, www/
|
|
|
|
ap-aolserver, www/openacs. Try to be consistent with them.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sometimes authors of a software package make some modifications after the
|
|
|
|
software was released, and they put up a new distfile without changing the
|
|
|
|
package's version number. If a package is already in pkgsrc at that time, the
|
2005-05-29 11:10:40 +02:00
|
|
|
checksum will no longer match. The contents of the new distfile should be
|
|
|
|
compared against the old one before changing anything, to make sure the
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
distfile was really updated on purpose, and that no trojan horse or so crept
|
2005-05-29 11:10:40 +02:00
|
|
|
in. Then, the correct way to work around this is to set DIST_SUBDIR to a unique
|
|
|
|
directory name, usually based on PKGNAME_NOREV. In case this happens more
|
|
|
|
often, PKGNAME can be used (thus including the nbX suffix) or a date stamp can
|
|
|
|
be appended, like ${PKGNAME_NOREV}-YYYYMMDD. Do not forget regenerating the
|
|
|
|
distinfo file after that, since it contains the DIST_SUBDIR path in the
|
|
|
|
filenames. Furthermore, a mail to the package's authors seems appropriate
|
|
|
|
telling them that changing distfiles after releases without changing the file
|
|
|
|
names is not good practice.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.3. Configuration gotchas
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc supports many different machines, with different object formats like
|
|
|
|
a.out and ELF, and varying abilities to do shared library and dynamic loading
|
|
|
|
at all. To accompany this, varying commands and options have to be passed to
|
|
|
|
the compiler, linker, etc. to get the Right Thing, which can be pretty annoying
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
especially if you don't have all the machines at your hand to test things. The
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
devel/libtool pkg can help here, as it just "knows" how to build both static
|
|
|
|
and dynamic libraries from a set of source files, thus being platform
|
|
|
|
independent.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here's how to use libtool in a pkg in seven simple steps:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Add USE_LIBTOOL=yes to the package Makefile.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. For library objects, use "${LIBTOOL} --mode=compile ${CC}" in place of "$
|
|
|
|
{CC}". You could even add it to the definition of CC, if only libraries are
|
|
|
|
being built in a given Makefile. This one command will build both PIC and
|
|
|
|
non-PIC library objects, so you need not have separate shared and
|
|
|
|
non-shared library rules.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. For the linking of the library, remove any "ar", "ranlib", and "ld
|
|
|
|
-Bshareable" commands, and instead use:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
${LIBTOOL} --mode=link ${CC} -o ${.TARGET:.a=.la} ${OBJS:.o=.lo} -rpath ${PREFIX}/lib -version-info major:minor
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Note that the library is changed to have a .la extension, and the objects
|
|
|
|
are changed to have a .lo extension. Change OBJS as necessary. This
|
|
|
|
automatically creates all of the .a, .so.major.minor, and ELF symlinks (if
|
|
|
|
necessary) in the build directory. Be sure to include "-version-info",
|
|
|
|
especially when major and minor are zero, as libtool will otherwise strip
|
|
|
|
off the shared library version.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
From the libtool manual:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
So, libtool library versions are described by three integers:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
CURRENT
|
|
|
|
The most recent interface number that this library implements.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
REVISION
|
|
|
|
The implementation number of the CURRENT interface.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
AGE
|
|
|
|
The difference between the newest and oldest interfaces that this
|
|
|
|
library implements. In other words, the library implements all the
|
|
|
|
interface numbers in the range from number `CURRENT - AGE' to
|
|
|
|
`CURRENT'.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
If two libraries have identical CURRENT and AGE numbers, then the
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
dynamic linker chooses the library with the greater REVISION number.
|
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The "-release" option will produce different results for a.out and ELF
|
|
|
|
(excluding symlinks) in only one case. An ELF library of the form
|
|
|
|
"libfoo-release.so.x.y" will have a symlink of "libfoo.so.x.y" on an a.out
|
|
|
|
platform. This is handled automatically.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The "-rpath argument" is the install directory of the library being built.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-03-22 23:45:58 +01:00
|
|
|
In the PLIST, include only the .la file, the other files will be added
|
|
|
|
automatically.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4. When linking shared object (.so) files, i.e. files that are loaded via
|
|
|
|
dlopen(3), NOT shared libraries, use "-module -avoid-version" to prevent
|
|
|
|
them getting version tacked on.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The PLIST file gets the foo.so entry.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5. When linking programs that depend on these libraries before they are
|
|
|
|
installed, preface the cc(1) or ld(1) line with "${LIBTOOL} --mode=link",
|
|
|
|
and it will find the correct libraries (static or shared), but please be
|
|
|
|
aware that libtool will not allow you to specify a relative path in -L
|
|
|
|
(such as "-L../somelib"), because it expects you to change that argument to
|
|
|
|
be the .la file. e.g.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
${LIBTOOL} --mode=link ${CC} -o someprog -L../somelib -lsomelib
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
should be changed to:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
${LIBTOOL} --mode=link ${CC} -o someprog ../somelib/somelib.la
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
and it will do the right thing with the libraries.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
6. When installing libraries, preface the install(1) or cp(1) command with "$
|
|
|
|
{LIBTOOL} --mode=install", and change the library name to .la. e.g.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
${LIBTOOL} --mode=install ${BSD_INSTALL_DATA} ${SOMELIB:.a=.la} ${PREFIX}/lib
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
This will install the static .a, shared library, any needed symlinks, and
|
|
|
|
run ldconfig(8).
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
7. In your PLIST, include only the .la file (this is a change from previous
|
|
|
|
behaviour).
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Add USE_LIBTOOL=yes to the package Makefile. This will override the package's
|
|
|
|
own libtool in most cases. For older libtool using packages, libtool is made by
|
|
|
|
ltconfig script during the do-configure step; you can check the libtool script
|
|
|
|
location by doing make configure; find work*/ -name libtool.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
LIBTOOL_OVERRIDE specifies which libtool scripts, relative to WRKSRC, to
|
|
|
|
override. By default, it is set to "libtool */libtool */*/libtool". If this
|
|
|
|
does not match the location of the package's libtool script(s), set it as
|
|
|
|
appropriate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you do not need *.a static libraries built and installed, then use
|
|
|
|
SHLIBTOOL_OVERRIDE instead.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If your package makes use of the platform independent library for loading
|
|
|
|
dynamic shared objects, that comes with libtool (libltdl), you should include
|
2005-04-12 21:00:37 +02:00
|
|
|
devel/libltdl/buildlink3.mk.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some packages use libtool incorrectly so that the package may not work or build
|
|
|
|
in some circumstances. Some of the more common errors are:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* The inclusion of a shared object (-module) as a dependent library in an
|
|
|
|
executable or library. This in itself isn't a problem if one of two things
|
|
|
|
has been done:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
1. The shared object is named correctly, i.e. libfoo.la, not foo.la
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. The -dlopen option is used when linking an executable.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* The use of libltdl without the correct calls to initialisation routines.
|
|
|
|
The function lt_dlinit() should be called and the macro
|
|
|
|
LTDL_SET_PRELOADED_SYMBOLS included in executables.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a package needs GNU autoconf or automake to be executed to regenerate the
|
|
|
|
configure script and Makefile.in makefile templates, then they should be
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
executed in a pre-configure target.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For packages that need only autoconf:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
AUTOCONF_REQD= 2.50 # if default version is not good enough
|
|
|
|
USE_TOOLS+= autoconf # use "autoconf213" for autoconf-2.13
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pre-configure:
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
cd ${WRKSRC}; autoconf
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
and for packages that need automake and autoconf:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
AUTOMAKE_REQD= 1.7.1 # if default version is not good enough
|
|
|
|
USE_TOOLS+= automake # use "automake14" for autoconf-1.4
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
pre-configure:
|
|
|
|
cd ${WRKSRC}; \
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
aclocal; autoheader; \
|
|
|
|
automake -a --foreign -i; autoconf
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
Packages which use GNU Automake will almost certainly require GNU Make.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are times when the configure process makes additional changes to the
|
|
|
|
generated files, which then causes the build process to try to re-execute the
|
|
|
|
automake sequence. This is prevented by touching various files in the configure
|
|
|
|
stage. If this causes problems with your package you can set AUTOMAKE_OVERRIDE=
|
|
|
|
NO in the package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.4. Building considerations
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.4.1. CPP defines
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To port an application to NetBSD, it's usually necessary for the compiler to be
|
|
|
|
able to judge the system on which it's compiling, and we use definitions so
|
|
|
|
that the C pre-processor can do this.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To test whether you are working on a 4.4 BSD-derived system, you should use the
|
|
|
|
BSD definition, which is defined in <sys/param.h> on said systems.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#include <sys/param.h>
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
and then you can surround the BSD-specific parts of your package's C/C++ code
|
|
|
|
using this conditional:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
#if (defined(BSD) && BSD >= 199306)
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please use the "__NetBSD__" definition sparingly - it should only apply to
|
|
|
|
features of NetBSD that are not present in other 4.4-lite derived BSDs.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5. Package specific actions
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.1. User interaction
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Occasionally, packages require interaction from the user, and this can be in a
|
|
|
|
number of ways:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* help in fetching the distfiles
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* help to configure the package before it is built
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* help during the build process
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* help during the installation of a package
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
The INTERACTIVE_STAGE definition is provided to notify the pkgsrc mechanism of
|
|
|
|
an interactive stage which will be needed, and this should be set in the
|
|
|
|
package's Makefile. e.g.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
INTERACTIVE_STAGE= build
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Multiple interactive stages can be specified:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
INTERACTIVE_STAGE= configure install
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.2. Handling licenses
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A package may underly a license which the user has or has not agreed to accept.
|
|
|
|
Usually, packages that underly well-known Open Source licenses (e.g. the GNU
|
|
|
|
Public License, GPL) won't have any special license tags added in pkgsrc which
|
|
|
|
require special action by the user of such packages, but there are quite a
|
|
|
|
number of other licenses out there that pkgsrc users may not be able to follow,
|
|
|
|
for whatever reasons. For these cases, pkgsrc contains a mechanism to note that
|
|
|
|
a package underlies a certain license, and the user has to accept the license
|
|
|
|
before the package can be installed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Placing a certain package under a certain license works by setting the LICENSE
|
|
|
|
variable to a string identifying the license, e.g. in graphics/graphviz:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
LICENSE= graphviz-license
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When trying to build, the user will get a notice that the package underlies a
|
|
|
|
license which he hasn't accepted (yet):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
% make
|
|
|
|
===> graphviz-1.12 has an unacceptable license: graphviz-license.
|
|
|
|
===> To build this package, add this line to your /etc/mk.conf:
|
|
|
|
===> ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES+=graphviz-license
|
|
|
|
===> To view the license, enter "/usr/bin/make show-license".
|
|
|
|
*** Error code 1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The license can be viewed with make show-license, and if it is considered
|
|
|
|
appropriate, the line printed above can be added to /etc/mk.conf to indicate
|
|
|
|
acceptance of the particular license:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES+=graphviz-license
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When adding a package with a new license, the license text should be added to
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc/licenses for displaying. A list of known licenses can be seen in this
|
|
|
|
directory as well as by looking at the list of (commented out)
|
2004-12-24 00:38:58 +01:00
|
|
|
ACCEPTABLE_LICENSES variable settings in pkgsrc/mk/defaults/mk.conf.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-02-10 12:30:00 +01:00
|
|
|
If there is a really pressing need to accept all licenses at once, like when
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
trying to download or mirror all distfiles or doing a bulk build to test if all
|
|
|
|
packages in pkgsrc build, this can be done by setting _ACCEPTABLE=yes.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.3. Installing score files
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Certain packages, most of them in the games category, install a score file that
|
|
|
|
allows all users on the system to record their highscores. In order for this to
|
|
|
|
work, the binaries need to be installed setgid and the score files owned by the
|
|
|
|
appropriate group and/or owner (traditionally the "games" user/group). The
|
2004-12-24 00:38:58 +01:00
|
|
|
following variables, documented in more detail in mk/defaults/mk.conf, control
|
|
|
|
this behaviour: SETGIDGAME, GAMEDATAMODE, GAMEGRP, GAMEMODE, GAMEOWN.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that per default, setgid installation of games is disabled; setting
|
|
|
|
SETGIDGAME=YES will set all the other variables accordingly.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A package should therefor never hard code file ownership or access permissions
|
|
|
|
but rely on INSTALL_GAME and INSTALL_GAME_DATA to set these correctly.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If your package contains interpreted perl scripts, set REPLACE_PERL to ensure
|
|
|
|
that the proper interpreter path is set. REPLACE_PERL should contain a list of
|
|
|
|
scripts, relative to WRKSRC, that you want adjusted.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Your package may also contain scripts with hardcoded paths to other
|
|
|
|
interpreters besides (or as well as) perl. To correct the full pathname to the
|
|
|
|
script interpreter, you need to set the following definitions in your Makefile
|
|
|
|
(we shall use tclsh in this example):
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
REPLACE_INTERPRETER+= tcl
|
|
|
|
_REPLACE.tcl.old= .*/bin/tclsh
|
|
|
|
_REPLACE.tcl.new= ${PREFIX}/bin/tclsh
|
|
|
|
_REPLACE_FILES.tcl= ...list of tcl scripts which need to be fixed,
|
|
|
|
relative to ${WRKSRC}, just as in REPLACE_PERL
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.6. Packages installing perl modules
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Makefiles of packages providing perl5 modules should include the Makefile
|
|
|
|
fragment ../../lang/perl5/module.mk. It provides a do-configure target for the
|
|
|
|
standard perl configuration for such modules as well as various hooks to tune
|
|
|
|
this configuration. See comments in this file for details.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Perl5 modules will install into different places depending on the version of
|
|
|
|
perl used during the build process. To address this, pkgsrc will append lines
|
|
|
|
to the PLIST corresponding to the files listed in the installed .packlist file
|
|
|
|
generated by most perl5 modules. This is invoked by defining PERL5_PACKLIST to
|
|
|
|
a space-separated list of paths to packlist files, e.g.:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
PERL5_PACKLIST= ${PERL5_SITEARCH}/auto/Pg/.packlist
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The variables PERL5_SITELIB, PERL5_SITEARCH, and PERL5_ARCHLIB represent the
|
|
|
|
three locations in which perl5 modules may be installed, and may be used by
|
|
|
|
perl5 packages that don't have a packlist. These three variables are also
|
|
|
|
substituted for in the PLIST.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.7. Packages installing info files
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some packages install info files or use the "makeinfo" or "install-info"
|
|
|
|
commands. Each of the info files:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* is considered to be installed in the directory ${PREFIX}/${INFO_DIR},
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* is registered in the Info directory file ${PREFIX}/${INFO_DIR}/dir,
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* and must be listed as a filename in the INFO_FILES variable in the package
|
|
|
|
Makefile.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
INFO_DIR defaults to "info" and can be overridden in the package Makefile.
|
|
|
|
INSTALL and DEINSTALL scripts will be generated to handle registration of the
|
|
|
|
info files in the Info directory file. The "install-info" command used for the
|
|
|
|
info files registration is either provided by the system, or by a special
|
|
|
|
purpose package automatically added as dependency if needed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A package which needs the "makeinfo" command at build time must define the
|
|
|
|
variable USE_MAKEINFO in its Makefile. If a minimum version of the "makeinfo"
|
|
|
|
command is needed it should be noted with the TEXINFO_REQD variable in the
|
|
|
|
package Makefile. By default, a minimum version of 3.12 is required. If the
|
|
|
|
system does not provide a makeinfo command or if it does not match the required
|
|
|
|
minimum, a build dependency on the devel/gtexinfo package will be added
|
|
|
|
automatically.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The build and installation process of the software provided by the package
|
|
|
|
should not use the install-info command as the registration of info files is
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
the task of the package INSTALL script, and it must use the appropriate
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
makeinfo command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To achieve this goal the pkgsrc infrastructure creates overriding scripts for
|
|
|
|
the install-info and makeinfo commands in a directory listed early in PATH.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The script overriding install-info has no effect except the logging of a
|
|
|
|
message. The script overriding makeinfo logs a message and according to the
|
|
|
|
value of USE_MAKEINFO and TEXINFO_REQD either run the appropriate makeinfo
|
|
|
|
command or exit on error.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.8. Packages installing GConf2 data files
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a package installs .schemas or .entries files, used by GConf2, you need to
|
|
|
|
take some extra steps to make sure they get registered in the database:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../devel/GConf2/schemas.mk instead of its buildlink3.mk file.
|
|
|
|
This takes care of rebuilding the GConf2 database at installation and
|
|
|
|
deinstallation time, and tells the package where to install GConf2 data
|
|
|
|
files using some standard configure arguments. It also disallows any access
|
|
|
|
to the database directly from the package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. Ensure that the package installs its .schemas files under ${PREFIX}/share/
|
|
|
|
gconf/schemas. If they get installed under ${PREFIX}/etc, you will need to
|
|
|
|
manually patch the package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the etc/gconf directory, as
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
they will be handled automatically. See Section 6.14, "How do I change the
|
|
|
|
location of configuration files?" for more information.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4. Define the GCONF2_SCHEMAS variable in your Makefile with a list of all
|
|
|
|
.schemas files installed by the package, if any. Names must not contain any
|
|
|
|
directories in them.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5. Define the GCONF2_ENTRIES variable in your Makefile with a list of all
|
|
|
|
.entries files installed by the package, if any. Names must not contain any
|
|
|
|
directories in them.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.9. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a package installs .omf files, used by scrollkeeper, you need to take some
|
|
|
|
extra steps to make sure they get registered in the database:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../textproc/scrollkeeper/omf.mk instead of its buildlink3.mk
|
|
|
|
file. This takes care of rebuilding the scrollkeeper database at
|
|
|
|
installation and deinstallation time, and disallows any access to it
|
|
|
|
directly from the package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the libdata/scrollkeeper
|
|
|
|
directory, as they will be handled automatically.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. Remove the share/omf directory from the PLIST. It will be handled by
|
|
|
|
scrollkeeper.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.10. Packages installing X11 fonts
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a package installs font files, you will need to rebuild the fonts database
|
|
|
|
in the directory where they get installed at installation and deinstallation
|
|
|
|
time. This can be automatically done by using mk/fonts.mk, which you need to
|
|
|
|
include in your Makefile.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the file is included, you can list the directories where fonts are
|
|
|
|
installed in the FONTS_type_DIRS variables, where type can be one of "TTF",
|
|
|
|
"TYPE1" or "X11". Also make sure that the database file fonts.dir is not listed
|
|
|
|
in the PLIST.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that you should not create new directories for fonts; instead use the
|
|
|
|
standard ones to avoid that the user needs to manually configure his X server
|
|
|
|
to find them.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.11. Packages installing GTK2 modules
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a package installs gtk2 immodules or loaders, you need to take some extra
|
|
|
|
steps to get them registered in the GTK2 database properly:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../x11/gtk2/modules.mk instead of its buildlink3.mk file. This
|
|
|
|
takes care of rebuilding the database at installation and deinstallation
|
|
|
|
time.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. Set GTK2_IMMODULES=YES if your package installs GTK2 immodules.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. Set GTK2_LOADERS=YES if your package installs GTK2 loaders.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4. Patch the package to not touch any of the gtk2 databases directly. These
|
|
|
|
are:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* libdata/gtk-2.0/gdk-pixbuf.loaders
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* libdata/gtk-2.0/gtk.immodules
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the libdata/gtk-2.0 directory,
|
|
|
|
as they will be handled automatically.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.12. Packages installing SGML or XML data
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a package installs SGML or XML data files that need to be registered in
|
|
|
|
system-wide catalogs (like DTDs, sub-catalogs, etc.), you need to take some
|
|
|
|
extra steps:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../textproc/xmlcatmgr/catalogs.mk in your Makefile, which takes
|
|
|
|
care of registering those files in system-wide catalogs at installation and
|
|
|
|
deinstallation time.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. Set SGML_CATALOGS to the full path of any SGML catalogs installed by the
|
|
|
|
package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. Set XML_CATALOGS to the full path of any XML catalogs installed by the
|
|
|
|
package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4. Set SGML_ENTRIES to individual entries to be added to the SGML catalog.
|
|
|
|
These come in groups of three strings; see xmlcatmgr(1) for more
|
|
|
|
information (specifically, arguments recognized by the 'add' action). Note
|
|
|
|
that you will normally not use this variable.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5. Set XML_ENTRIES to individual entries to be added to the XML catalog. These
|
|
|
|
come in groups of three strings; see xmlcatmgr(1) for more information
|
|
|
|
(specifically, arguments recognized by the 'add' action). Note that you
|
|
|
|
will normally not use this variable.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.13. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a package provides extensions to the MIME database by installing .xml files
|
|
|
|
inside ${PREFIX}/share/mime/packages, you need to take some extra steps to
|
|
|
|
ensure that the database is kept consistent with respect to these new files:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Include ../../databases/shared-mime-info/mimedb.mk (avoid using the
|
|
|
|
buildlink3.mk file from this same directory, which is reserved for
|
|
|
|
inclusion from other buildlink3.mk files). It takes care of rebuilding the
|
|
|
|
MIME database at installation and deinstallation time, and disallows any
|
|
|
|
access to it directly from the package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the share/mime directory,
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
except for files saved under share/mime/packages. The former are handled
|
|
|
|
automatically by the update-mime-database program, but the later are
|
|
|
|
package-dependent and must be removed by the package that installed them in
|
|
|
|
the first place.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. Remove any share/mime/* directories from the PLIST. They will be handled by
|
|
|
|
the shared-mime-info package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.14. Packages using intltool
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a package uses intltool during its build, include the ../../textproc/
|
|
|
|
intltool/buildlink3.mk file, which forces it to use the intltool package
|
|
|
|
provided by pkgsrc, instead of the one bundled with the distribution file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This tracks intltool's build-time dependencies and uses the latest available
|
|
|
|
version; this way, the package benefits of any bug fixes that may have appeared
|
|
|
|
since it was released.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.5.15. Packages installing startup scripts
|
2005-03-08 02:25:09 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a package contains a rc.d script, it won't be copied into the startup
|
|
|
|
directory by default, but you can enable it, by adding the option
|
|
|
|
PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS=YES in /etc/mk.conf. This option will copy the scripts into /
|
|
|
|
etc/rc.d when a package is installed, and it will automatically remove the
|
|
|
|
scripts when the package is deinstalled.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
14.6. Feedback to the author
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have found any bugs in the package you make available, if you had to do
|
|
|
|
special steps to make it run under NetBSD or if you enhanced the software in
|
|
|
|
various other ways, be sure to report these changes back to the original author
|
|
|
|
of the program! With that kind of support, the next release of the program can
|
|
|
|
incorporate these fixes, and people not using the NetBSD packages system can
|
|
|
|
win from your efforts.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Support the idea of free software!
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
Chapter 15. Debugging
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To check out all the gotchas when building a package, here are the steps that I
|
|
|
|
do in order to get a package working. Please note this is basically the same as
|
|
|
|
what was explained in the previous sections, only with some debugging aids.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Be sure to set PKG_DEVELOPER=1 in /etc/mk.conf
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Install pkgtools/url2pkg, create a directory for a new package, change into
|
|
|
|
it, then run url2pkg:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
% mkdir /usr/pkgsrc/category/examplepkg
|
|
|
|
% cd /usr/pkgsrc/category/examplepkg
|
|
|
|
% url2pkg http://www.example.com/path/to/distfile.tar.gz
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Edit the Makefile as requested.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Fill in the DESCR file
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Run make configure
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Add any dependencies glimpsed from documentation and the configure step to
|
|
|
|
the package's Makefile.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Make the package compile, doing multiple rounds of
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
% make
|
|
|
|
% pkgvi ${WRKSRC}/some/file/that/does/not/compile
|
|
|
|
% mkpatches
|
|
|
|
% patchdiff
|
|
|
|
% mv ${WRKDIR}/.newpatches/* patches
|
|
|
|
% make mps
|
|
|
|
% make clean
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Doing as non-root user will ensure that no files are modified that
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
shouldn't be, especially during the build phase. mkpatches, patchdiff and
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
pkgvi are from the pkgtools/pkgdiff package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
* Look at the Makefile, fix if necessary; see Section 7.1, "Makefile".
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Generate a PLIST:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# make install
|
|
|
|
# make print-PLIST >PLIST
|
|
|
|
# make deinstall
|
|
|
|
# make install
|
|
|
|
# make deinstall
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
You usually need to be root to do this. Look if there are any files left:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# make print-PLIST
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
If this reveals any files that are missing in PLIST, add them.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Now that the PLIST is OK, install the package again and make a binary
|
|
|
|
package:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# make reinstall
|
|
|
|
# make package
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Delete the installed package:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# pkg_delete blub
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Repeat the above make print-PLIST command, which shouldn't find anything
|
|
|
|
now:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# make print-PLIST
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Reinstall the binary package:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# pkgadd .../blub.tgz
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Play with it. Make sure everything works.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Run pkglint from pkgtools/pkglint, and fix the problems it reports:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
# pkglint
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
* Submit (or commit, if you have cvs access); see Chapter 16, Submitting and
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Committing.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
Chapter 16. Submitting and Committing
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
16.1. Submitting your packages
|
|
|
|
16.2. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
|
|
|
|
16.3. Updating a package to a newer version
|
|
|
|
16.4. Moving a package in pkgsrc
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
16.1. Submitting your packages
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You have to separate between binary and "normal" (source) packages here:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* precompiled binary packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Our policy is that we accept binaries only from pkgsrc developers to
|
|
|
|
guarantee that the packages don't contain any trojan horses etc. This is
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
not to annoy anyone but rather to protect our users! You're still free to
|
|
|
|
put up your home-made binary packages and tell the world where to get them.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
NetBSD developers doing bulk builds and wanting to upload them please see
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
Section 5.3.8, "Uploading results of a bulk build".
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* packages
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
First, check that your package is complete, compiles and runs well; see
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
Chapter 15, Debugging and the rest of this document. Next, generate an
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
uuencoded gzipped tar(1) archive, preferably with all files in a single
|
|
|
|
directory. Finally, send-pr with category "pkg", a synopsis which includes
|
|
|
|
the package name and version number, a short description of your package
|
|
|
|
(contents of the COMMENT variable or DESCR file are OK) and attach the
|
|
|
|
archive to your PR.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
If you want to submit several packages, please send a separate PR for each
|
|
|
|
one, it's easier for us to track things that way.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Alternatively, you can also import new packages into pkgsrc-wip ("pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
work-in-progress"); see the homepage at http://pkgsrc-wip.sourceforge.net/
|
|
|
|
for details.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
16.2. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This section is only of interest for pkgsrc developers with write access to the
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc repository. Please remember that cvs imports files relative to the
|
|
|
|
current working directory, and that the pathname that you give the cvs import
|
|
|
|
command is so that it knows where to place the files in the repository. Newly
|
|
|
|
created packages should be imported with a vendor tag of "TNF" and a release
|
|
|
|
tag of "pkgsrc-base", e.g:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
% cd .../pkgsrc/category/pkgname
|
|
|
|
% cvs import pkgsrc/category/pkgname TNF pkgsrc-base
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Remember to move the directory from which you imported out of the way, or cvs
|
|
|
|
will complain the next time you "cvs update" your source tree. Also don't
|
|
|
|
forget to add the new package to the category's Makefile.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The commit message of the initial import should include part of the DESCR file,
|
|
|
|
so people reading the mailing lists know what the package is/does.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please note all package updates/additions in pkgsrc/doc/CHANGES. It's very
|
|
|
|
important to keep this file up to date and conforming to the existing format,
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
because it will be used by scripts to automatically update pages on
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
www.NetBSD.org and other sites. Additionally, check the pkgsrc/doc/TODO file
|
|
|
|
and remove the entry for the package you updated, in case it was mentioned
|
|
|
|
there.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
For new packages, "cvs import" is preferred to "cvs add" because the former
|
|
|
|
gets everything with a single command, and provides a consistent tag.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
16.3. Updating a package to a newer version
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please always put a concise, appropriate and relevant summary of the changes
|
|
|
|
between old and new versions into the commit log when updating a package. There
|
|
|
|
are various reasons for this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
* A URL is volatile, and can change over time. It may go away completely or
|
|
|
|
its information may be overwritten by newer information.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Having the change information between old and new versions in our CVS
|
|
|
|
repository is very useful for people who use either cvs or anoncvs.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
* Having the change information between old and new versions in our CVS
|
|
|
|
repository is very useful for people who read the pkgsrc-changes mailing
|
|
|
|
list, so that they can make tactical decisions about when to upgrade the
|
|
|
|
package.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2005-03-08 02:25:09 +01:00
|
|
|
Please also recognize that, just because a new version of a package has been
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
released, it should not automatically be upgraded in the CVS repository. We
|
|
|
|
prefer to be conservative in the packages that are included in pkgsrc -
|
|
|
|
development or beta packages are not really the best thing for most places in
|
|
|
|
which pkgsrc is used. Please use your judgement about what should go into
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc, and bear in mind that stability is to be preferred above new and
|
|
|
|
possibly untested features.
|
|
|
|
|
2005-06-03 14:28:56 +02:00
|
|
|
16.4. Moving a package in pkgsrc
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Make a copy of the directory somewhere else.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. Remove all CVS dirs.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Alternatively to the first two steps you can also do:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
% cvs -d user@cvs.NetBSD.org:/cvsroot export -D today pkgsrc/category/package
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
and use that for further work.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. Fix CATEGORIES and any DEPENDS paths that just did "../package" instead of
|
|
|
|
"../../category/package".
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
4. cvs import the modified package in the new place.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
5. Check if any package depends on it:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
% cd /usr/pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
% grep /package */*/Makefile* */*/buildlink*
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
6. Fix paths in packages from step 5 to point to new location.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
7. cvs rm (-f) the package at the old location.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
8. Remove from oldcategory/Makefile.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
9. Add to newcategory/Makefile.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
10. Commit the changed and removed files:
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
% cvs commit oldcategory/package oldcategory/Makefile newcategory/Makefile
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
(and any packages from step 5, of course).
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
Appendix A. A simple example package: bison
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A.1. files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
A.1.1. Makefile
|
|
|
|
A.1.2. DESCR
|
|
|
|
A.1.3. PLIST
|
|
|
|
A.1.4. Checking a package with pkglint
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
A.2. Steps for building, installing, packaging
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
We checked to find a piece of software that wasn't in the packages collection,
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
and picked GNU bison. Quite why someone would want to have bison when Berkeley
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
yacc is already present in the tree is beyond us, but it's useful for the
|
|
|
|
purposes of this exercise.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A.1. files
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A.1.1. Makefile
|
|
|
|
|
2005-02-10 12:30:00 +01:00
|
|
|
# $NetBSD$
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
DISTNAME= bison-1.25
|
|
|
|
CATEGORIES= devel
|
|
|
|
MASTER_SITES= ${MASTER_SITE_GNU}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MAINTAINER= thorpej@NetBSD.org
|
|
|
|
HOMEPAGE= http://www.gnu.org/software/bison/bison.html
|
|
|
|
COMMENT= GNU yacc clone
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
GNU_CONFIGURE= yes
|
|
|
|
INFO_FILES= bison.info
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
.include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk"
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A.1.2. DESCR
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
GNU version of yacc. Can make re-entrant parsers, and numerous other
|
|
|
|
improvements. Why you would want this when Berkeley yacc(1) is part
|
|
|
|
of the NetBSD source tree is beyond me.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A.1.3. PLIST
|
|
|
|
|
2005-02-10 12:30:00 +01:00
|
|
|
@comment $NetBSD$
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
bin/bison
|
|
|
|
man/man1/bison.1.gz
|
|
|
|
share/bison.simple
|
|
|
|
share/bison.hairy
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A.1.4. Checking a package with pkglint
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The NetBSD package system comes with pkgtools/pkglint which helps to check the
|
|
|
|
contents of these files. After installation it is quite easy to use, just
|
|
|
|
change to the directory of the package you wish to examine and execute pkglint:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
$ pkglint
|
|
|
|
looks fine.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Depending on the supplied command line arguments (see pkglint(1)) more verbose
|
|
|
|
checks will be performed. Use e.g. pkglint -v for a very verbose check.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
A.2. Steps for building, installing, packaging
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Create the directory where the package lives, plus any auxiliary directories:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# cd /usr/pkgsrc/lang
|
|
|
|
# mkdir bison
|
|
|
|
# cd bison
|
|
|
|
# mkdir patches
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-16 11:32:16 +02:00
|
|
|
Create Makefile, DESCR and PLIST (see Chapter 7, Package components - files,
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
directories and contents) then continue with fetching the distfile:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# make fetch
|
|
|
|
>> bison-1.25.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist on this system.
|
|
|
|
>> Attempting to fetch from ftp://prep.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu//.
|
|
|
|
Requesting ftp://prep.ai.mit.edu/pub/gnu//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/)
|
|
|
|
ftp: Error retrieving file: 500 Internal error
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
>> Attempting to fetch from ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/systems/gnu//.
|
|
|
|
Requesting ftp://wuarchive.wustl.edu/systems/gnu//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/)
|
|
|
|
ftp: Error retrieving file: 500 Internal error
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
>> Attempting to fetch from ftp://ftp.freebsd.org/pub/FreeBSD/distfiles//.
|
|
|
|
Requesting ftp://ftp.freebsd.org/pub/FreeBSD/distfiles//bison-1.25.tar.gz (via ftp://orpheus.amdahl.com:80/)
|
|
|
|
Successfully retrieved file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Generate the checksum of the distfile into distinfo:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# make makesum
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Now compile:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# make
|
|
|
|
>> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz.
|
|
|
|
===> Extracting for bison-1.25
|
|
|
|
===> Patching for bison-1.25
|
|
|
|
===> Ignoring empty patch directory
|
|
|
|
===> Configuring for bison-1.25
|
|
|
|
creating cache ./config.cache
|
|
|
|
checking for gcc... cc
|
|
|
|
checking whether we are using GNU C... yes
|
|
|
|
checking for a BSD compatible install... /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin
|
|
|
|
checking how to run the C preprocessor... cc -E
|
|
|
|
checking for minix/config.h... no
|
|
|
|
checking for POSIXized ISC... no
|
|
|
|
checking whether cross-compiling... no
|
|
|
|
checking for ANSI C header files... yes
|
|
|
|
checking for string.h... yes
|
|
|
|
checking for stdlib.h... yes
|
|
|
|
checking for memory.h... yes
|
|
|
|
checking for working const... yes
|
|
|
|
checking for working alloca.h... no
|
|
|
|
checking for alloca... yes
|
|
|
|
checking for strerror... yes
|
|
|
|
updating cache ./config.cache
|
|
|
|
creating ./config.status
|
|
|
|
creating Makefile
|
|
|
|
===> Building for bison-1.25
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g LR0.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g allocate.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g closure.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g conflicts.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g derives.c
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
cc -c -DXPFILE=\"/usr/pkg/share/bison.simple\" -DXPFILE1=\"/usr/pkg/share/bison.hairy\" -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -g ./files.c
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g getargs.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g gram.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g lalr.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g lex.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g main.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g nullable.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g output.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g print.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g reader.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g reduce.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g symtab.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g warshall.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g version.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g getopt.c
|
|
|
|
cc -c -DSTDC_HEADERS=1 -DHAVE_STRING_H=1 -DHAVE_STDLIB_H=1 -DHAVE_MEMORY_H=1 -DHAVE_ALLOCA=1 -DHAVE_STRERROR=1 -I./../include -g getopt1.c
|
|
|
|
cc -g -o bison LR0.o allocate.o closure.o conflicts.o derives.o files.o getargs.o gram.o lalr.o lex.o main.o nullable.o output.o print.o reader.o reduce.o symtab.o warshall.o version.o getopt.o getopt1.o
|
|
|
|
./files.c:240: warning: mktemp() possibly used unsafely, consider using mkstemp()
|
|
|
|
rm -f bison.s1
|
|
|
|
sed -e "/^#line/ s|bison|/usr/pkg/share/bison|" < ./bison.simple > bison.s1
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Everything seems OK, so install the files:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# make install
|
|
|
|
>> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz.
|
|
|
|
===> Installing for bison-1.25
|
|
|
|
sh ./mkinstalldirs /usr/pkg/bin /usr/pkg/share /usr/pkg/info /usr/pkg/man/man1
|
|
|
|
rm -f /usr/pkg/bin/bison
|
|
|
|
cd /usr/pkg/share; rm -f bison.simple bison.hairy
|
|
|
|
rm -f /usr/pkg/man/man1/bison.1 /usr/pkg/info/bison.info*
|
|
|
|
install -c -o bin -g bin -m 555 bison /usr/pkg/bin/bison
|
|
|
|
/usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 bison.s1 /usr/pkg/share/bison.simple
|
|
|
|
/usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 ./bison.hairy /usr/pkg/share/bison.hairy
|
|
|
|
cd .; for f in bison.info*; do /usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 $f /usr/pkg/info/$f; done
|
|
|
|
/usr/bin/install -c -o bin -g bin -m 644 ./bison.1 /usr/pkg/man/man1/bison.1
|
|
|
|
===> Registering installation for bison-1.25
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can now use bison, and also - if you decide so - remove it with pkg_delete
|
|
|
|
bison. Should you decide that you want a binary package, do this now:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# make package
|
|
|
|
>> Checksum OK for bison-1.25.tar.gz.
|
|
|
|
===> Building package for bison-1.25
|
|
|
|
Creating package bison-1.25.tgz
|
|
|
|
Registering depends:.
|
|
|
|
Creating gzip'd tar ball in '/u/pkgsrc/lang/bison/bison-1.25.tgz'
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Now that you don't need the source and object files any more, clean up:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# make clean
|
|
|
|
===> Cleaning for bison-1.25
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Appendix B. Build logs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
B.1. Building figlet
|
|
|
|
B.2. Packaging figlet
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
B.1. Building figlet
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# make
|
|
|
|
===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
=> figlet221.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist on this system.
|
|
|
|
=> Attempting to fetch figlet221.tar.gz from ftp://ftp.figlet.org/pub/figlet/program/unix/.
|
|
|
|
=> [172219 bytes]
|
|
|
|
Connected to ftp.plig.net.
|
|
|
|
220 ftp.plig.org NcFTPd Server (licensed copy) ready.
|
|
|
|
331 Guest login ok, send your complete e-mail address as password.
|
|
|
|
230-You are user #5 of 500 simultaneous users allowed.
|
|
|
|
230-
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
230- ___ _ _ _
|
|
|
|
230- | _| |_ ___ ___| |_|___ ___ ___ ___
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
230- | _| _| . |_| . | | | . |_| . | _| . |
|
|
|
|
230- |_| |_| | _|_| _|_|_|_ |_|___|_| |_ |
|
|
|
|
230- |_| |_| |___| |___|
|
|
|
|
230-
|
|
|
|
230-** Welcome to ftp.plig.org **
|
|
|
|
230-
|
|
|
|
230-Please note that all transfers from this FTP site are logged. If you
|
|
|
|
230-do not like this, please disconnect now.
|
|
|
|
230-
|
|
|
|
230-This arhive is available via
|
|
|
|
230-
|
|
|
|
230-HTTP: http://ftp.plig.org/
|
|
|
|
230-FTP: ftp://ftp.plig.org/ (max 500 connections)
|
|
|
|
230-RSYNC: rsync://ftp.plig.org/ (max 30 connections)
|
|
|
|
230-
|
|
|
|
230-Please email comments, bug reports and requests for packages to be
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
230-mirrored to ftp-admin@plig.org.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
230-
|
|
|
|
230-
|
|
|
|
230 Logged in anonymously.
|
|
|
|
Remote system type is UNIX.
|
|
|
|
Using binary mode to transfer files.
|
|
|
|
200 Type okay.
|
|
|
|
250 "/pub" is new cwd.
|
|
|
|
250-"/pub/figlet" is new cwd.
|
|
|
|
250-
|
|
|
|
250-Welcome to the figlet archive at ftp.figlet.org
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
250-
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
250- ftp://ftp.figlet.org/pub/figlet/
|
|
|
|
250-
|
|
|
|
250-The official FIGlet web page is:
|
|
|
|
250- http://www.figlet.org/
|
|
|
|
250-
|
|
|
|
250-If you have questions, please mailto:info@figlet.org. If you want to
|
|
|
|
250-contribute a font or something else, you can email us.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
250
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
250 "/pub/figlet/program" is new cwd.
|
|
|
|
250 "/pub/figlet/program/unix" is new cwd.
|
|
|
|
local: figlet221.tar.gz remote: figlet221.tar.gz
|
|
|
|
502 Unimplemented command.
|
|
|
|
227 Entering Passive Mode (195,40,6,41,246,104)
|
|
|
|
150 Data connection accepted from 84.128.86.72:65131; transfer starting for figlet221.tar.gz (172219 bytes).
|
|
|
|
38% |************** | 65800 64.16 KB/s 00:01 ETA
|
|
|
|
226 Transfer completed.
|
|
|
|
172219 bytes received in 00:02 (75.99 KB/s)
|
|
|
|
221 Goodbye.
|
|
|
|
=> Checksum OK for figlet221.tar.gz.
|
|
|
|
===> Extracting for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
===> Required installed package ccache-[0-9]*: ccache-2.3nb1 found
|
|
|
|
===> Patching for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
===> Applying pkgsrc patches for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
===> Overriding tools for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
===> Creating toolchain wrappers for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
===> Configuring for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
===> Building for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
gcc -O2 -DDEFAULTFONTDIR=\"/usr/pkg/share/figlet\" -DDEFAULTFONTFILE=\"standard.flf\" figlet.c zipio.c crc.c inflate.c -o figlet
|
|
|
|
chmod a+x figlet
|
|
|
|
gcc -O2 -o chkfont chkfont.c
|
|
|
|
=> Unwrapping files-to-be-installed.
|
|
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
# make install
|
|
|
|
===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
===> Installing for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
install -d -o root -g wheel -m 755 /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
|
|
install -d -o root -g wheel -m 755 /usr/pkg/man/man6
|
|
|
|
mkdir -p /usr/pkg/share/figlet
|
|
|
|
cp figlet /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
|
|
cp chkfont /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
|
|
chmod 555 figlist showfigfonts
|
|
|
|
cp figlist /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
|
|
cp showfigfonts /usr/pkg/bin
|
|
|
|
cp fonts/*.flf /usr/pkg/share/figlet
|
|
|
|
cp fonts/*.flc /usr/pkg/share/figlet
|
|
|
|
cp figlet.6 /usr/pkg/man/man6
|
|
|
|
===> Registering installation for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
B.2. Packaging figlet
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# make package
|
|
|
|
===> Checking for vulnerabilities in figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
===> Packaging figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
===> Building binary package for figlet-2.2.1nb2
|
|
|
|
Creating package /home/cvs/pkgsrc/packages/i386/All/figlet-2.2.1nb2.tgz
|
|
|
|
Using SrcDir value of /usr/pkg
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
Registering depends:.
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
#
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Appendix C. Layout of the FTP server's package archive
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Layout for precompiled binary packages on ftp.NetBSD.org:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/pub/NetBSD/packages/
|
|
|
|
distfiles/
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# Unpacked pkgsrc trees
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc-current -> /pub/NetBSD/NetBSD-current/pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc-2003Q4 -> N/A
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc-2004Q1/pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# pkgsrc archives
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc-current.tar.gz -> ../NetBSD-current/tar_files/pkgsrc.tar.gz
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc-2003Q4.tar.gz -> N/A
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc-2004Q1.tar.gz -> N/A
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# Per pkgsrc-release/OS-release/arch package archives
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc-2003Q4/
|
|
|
|
NetBSD-1.6.2/
|
|
|
|
i386/
|
|
|
|
All/
|
|
|
|
archivers/
|
|
|
|
foo -> ../All/foo
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc-2004Q1/
|
|
|
|
NetBSD-1.6.2/
|
|
|
|
i386/
|
|
|
|
All/
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
NetBSD-2.0/
|
|
|
|
i386/
|
|
|
|
All/
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
SunOS-5.9/
|
|
|
|
sparc/
|
|
|
|
All/
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
x86/
|
|
|
|
All/
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
# Per os-release package archive convenience links
|
|
|
|
NetBSD-1.6.2 -> 1.6.2
|
|
|
|
1.6.2/
|
|
|
|
i386 -> ../pkgsrc-2004Q1/NetBSD-1.6.2/i386
|
|
|
|
m68k/
|
|
|
|
All/
|
|
|
|
archivers/
|
|
|
|
foo -> ../All/foo
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
amiga -> m68k
|
|
|
|
atari -> m68k
|
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.0 -> NetBSD-2.0 # backward compat, historic
|
|
|
|
NetBSD-2.0/
|
|
|
|
i386 -> ../pkgsrc-2004Q1/NetBSD-2.0/i386
|
|
|
|
SunOS-5.9/
|
|
|
|
sparc -> ../pkgsrc-2004Q1/SunOS-5.9/sparc
|
|
|
|
x86 -> ../pkgsrc-2004Q1/SunOS-5.9/x86
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
To create:
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Run bulk build, see Section 5.3, "Doing a bulk build of all packages"
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
2. Upload /usr/pkgsrc/packages to
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/\
|
2005-01-10 22:03:04 +01:00
|
|
|
pkgsrc-2004Q4/\ # pkgsrc-branch
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
`uname -s`-`uname -r`/ # OS & version
|
|
|
|
`uname -p` # architecture
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
3. If necessary, create a symlink ln -s `uname -m` `uname -p` (amiga -> m68k,
|
|
|
|
...)
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
Appendix D. Editing guidelines for the pkgsrc guide
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Table of Contents
|
2004-10-21 16:44:39 +02:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
D.1. Targets
|
|
|
|
D.2. Procedure
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
This section contains information on editing the pkgsrc guide itself.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
D.1. Targets
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The pkgsrc guide's source code is stored in pkgsrc/doc/guide/files, and several
|
|
|
|
files are created from it:
|
|
|
|
|
2005-05-08 00:41:15 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.txt
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
* pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.html
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
* http://www.NetBSD.org/Documentation/pkgsrc/: the documentation on the
|
|
|
|
NetBSD website will be built from pkgsrc and kept up to date on the web
|
|
|
|
server itself. This means you must make sure that your changes haven't
|
|
|
|
broken the build!
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-11-21 04:50:45 +01:00
|
|
|
* http://www.NetBSD.org/Documentation/pkgsrc/pkgsrc.pdf: PDF version of the
|
|
|
|
pkgsrc guide.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-11-21 04:50:45 +01:00
|
|
|
* http://www.NetBSD.org/Documentation/pkgsrc/pkgsrc.ps: PostScript version of
|
|
|
|
the pkgsrc guide.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
D.2. Procedure
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
The procedure to edit the pkgsrc guide is:
|
|
|
|
|
2004-11-21 04:50:45 +01:00
|
|
|
* Make sure you have the packages needed to re-generate the pkgsrc guide (and
|
2004-12-24 00:38:58 +01:00
|
|
|
other XML-based NetBSD documentation) installed. These are "netbsd-doc" for
|
|
|
|
creating the ASCII- and HTML-version, and "netbsd-doc-print"for the
|
2004-11-21 04:50:45 +01:00
|
|
|
PostScript- and PDF version. You will need both packages installed, to make
|
|
|
|
sure documentation is consistent across all formats. The packages can be
|
|
|
|
found in pkgsrc/meta-pkgs/netbsd-doc and pkgsrc/meta-pkgs/netbsd-doc-print.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-11-21 04:50:45 +01:00
|
|
|
* Edit the XML file(s) in pkgsrc/doc/guide/files.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-11-21 04:50:45 +01:00
|
|
|
* Run make extract && make do-lint in pkgsrc/doc/guide to check the XML
|
|
|
|
syntax, and fix it if needed.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-11-21 04:50:45 +01:00
|
|
|
* Run make in pkgsrc/doc/guide to build the HTML and ASCII version.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-11-09 18:38:23 +01:00
|
|
|
* If all is well, run make install-doc to put the generated files into pkgsrc
|
|
|
|
/doc.
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-10-22 02:27:55 +02:00
|
|
|
* cvs commit pkgsrc/doc/guide/files
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-11-21 04:50:45 +01:00
|
|
|
* cvs commit -m re-generate pkgsrc/doc/pkgsrc.{html,txt}
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-11-09 18:38:23 +01:00
|
|
|
* Until the webserver on www.NetBSD.org is really updated automatically to
|
|
|
|
pick up changes to the pkgsrc guide automatically, also run make
|
2005-03-08 02:25:09 +01:00
|
|
|
install-htdocs HTDOCSDIR=../../../htdocs (or similar, adjust HTDOCSDIR!).
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|
2004-11-09 18:38:23 +01:00
|
|
|
* cvs commit htdocs/Documentation/pkgsrc
|
2005-03-24 05:56:16 +01:00
|
|
|
|